- Manuals
- Brands
- Canon
- 2015
- BCTV Zoom Lens
- Operation Manual
Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual PDF
Summary of Content for Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual PDF
ENGLISH VERSION See Page E1 ........................... C1
1
BCTV
CD-ROM
2
.......................................................................................................................................................2
................................................................................................................5
..................................................................................................................................9
................................................................................................................. 11
............................................................................................................................12
1. 1.1 .........................................................................................................................1-2
Top ..........................................................................................................................................................1-2 MENU .....................................................................................................................................................1-3
2. Top 2.1 Top .........................................................................................................................2-2
2.2 .......................................................................................................................................2-4 (User 0 9) .....................................................................................................................2-5
(User A) ....................................................................................................................2-6 (User A) ....................................................................................................................2-9
2.3 ................................................................................................................2-12 (1) .........................................................................................................2-12 (2) ......................................................................................................2-13
2.4 ON/OFF ..........................................................................................2-14
2.5 AUX1 ..................................................................................................2-15
2.6 VTR .....................................................................................................2-16
2.7 AUX2 ..................................................................................................2-17
2.8 RET .....................................................................................................2-18 2.9 Frame Preset1 .................................................................................................................2-19
(1) Frame Preset1 ....................................................................................2-19 (2) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF .......................................................................................2-20 (3) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A ........................................2-21
2.10 Frame Preset2 ..............................................................................................................2-22 (1) Frame Preset2 ....................................................................................2-22 (2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF .......................................................................................2-23 (3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A ........................................2-24
2.11 ..............................................................................................................2-25
2.12 ......................................................................................................2-26 (1) .............................................................................................................2-26 (2) ...............................................................................................2-27
2.13 A/M .................................................................................................2-28
2.14 ..........................................................................................................2-29
3
3. MENU 3.1 MENU .....................................................................................................................3-2
3.2 User ......................................................................................................................................3-3 (User 0 9) .........................................................................................................................3-4 ................................................................................................................................3-5 ..................................................................................................................................................3-6
(1) 1 .....................................................................................................3-6 (2) ....................................................................................................3-7
1 1 .....................................................................................3-8 .......................................................................................................................3-10
(1) 1 ...............................................................3-10 (2) ..............................................................3-12 (3) ........................................................................................................................3-14
(User 0 9) ...................................................................................................................3-15 (User A) .......................................................................................................................3-19 (User A) .......................................................................................................................3-23 ............................................................................................................................................3-26
3.3 Switch .................................................................................................................................3-27 AUX1 ............................................................................................................3-28 AUX2 ............................................................................................................3-29 VTR ...............................................................................................................3-30 RET ...............................................................................................................3-31 A/M ......................................................................................................................3-32 .......................................................................................................................3-33
3.4 Preset .................................................................................................................................3-35 Frame Preset1 ..............................................................................................3-36 Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ....................................................................................................3-37 Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A .....................................................3-38 Frame Preset2 ..............................................................................................3-39 Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ....................................................................................................3-40 Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A .....................................................3-41 ..............................................................................................3-42 .................................................................................................3-43 .................................................................................................3-44
3.5 Iris .......................................................................................................................................3-45 ..................................................................................................................................3-46
(1) .............................................................................................................3-46 (2) .........................................................................................................3-47
..................................................................................................................................3-48 ON/OFF ..................................................................................................................3-49 ON/OFF ....................................................................................................3-50
3.6 Zoom ..................................................................................................................................3-51 ON/OFF ..................................................................................................................3-52 F-Hold ON/OFF ............................................................................................................................3-53 ............................................................................................................3-54 ............................................................................................................3-55 ............................................................................................................3-56 .......................................................................................................................3-57 ............................................................................................................3-58
4
..............................................................................................3-59 ..............................................................................................3-60 .....................................................................................................3-61 / ................................................3-62 ..........................................................................................................................3-63
3.7 Focus ..................................................................................................................................3-65 A .......................................................................3-66
3.8 Info .....................................................................................................................................3-67 ..................................................................................................................................3-68 ............................................................................................................................................3-69 / .........................................................................................................3-71 ..............................................................................................................................3-72
3.9 Fol. ......................................................................................................................................3-75 Iris,Zoom,Focus ..................................................................................................3-76
4.
...........................................................................................................................
5
6
1.
2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7
1.
1.
1.
2.
1.
1.
8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
146-8501 108-8011 3-30-2 2-16-6
9
2.9 Frame Preset1
(1) Frame Preset1
R
1 4
2
3
4
Frame1
A
*
*
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
PRE FAST
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
(D)
(D)
Set
PRE FAST
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
2.9 Frame Preset1 Frame Preset1
2-19
+
2-5 3-4
PRE 3-42
[ Frm1 ]
T O P
10
A
IRSE R
IASE AA
R R
Frame1
FAST
Top
A
R
11
DISPLAY
1 1
2
5
PUSH SetSet
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2-2
Point 2 Fol.
Point
OFF
12
3-6
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
1-1
1
1-2
1.1
1.1
Top
Top Fig1-1
14 8 Fig1-2
1. MENU
2.
3.
4. ON/OFF
5. AUX1
6. VTR
7. AUX2
8. RET
9. Frame Preset1
10. Frame Preset2
11.
12.
13. A/M
14.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Fig1-1
Top
2. Top
Fig1-2
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
33 3 Top
MENU
Top 14
1-3
1.1
MENU
3. MENU
1. User ......... Fig1-3 2. Switch .......... Fig1-4 3. Preset ........... Fig1-5 4. Iris .......... Fig1-6 5. Zoom ........... Fig1-7 6. Focus 2 .......... Fig1-8 7. Info. ........ Fig1-9
8. Fol. ......... Fig1-10
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
User
Fig1-3
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Switch
Fig1-4
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Preset
Fig1-5
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Iris
Fig1-6
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Zoom
Fig1-7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Focus
Fig1-8
CurveMode Focus [ ]
Fol.
Fig1-10
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Info
Fig1-9
Info
Initialize CamSeri: ON
Encoder: OFF
MENU
33 3 8 R 7 MENU 1
1MENU 8 MENU
2R
Top MENU Set User
[ ]
1
2-1
2 Top
2-2
2.1 Top
2.1 Top
Top Top 14 Top 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ]
[ Frm2 ][ Frm1 ]
ZoomNormAM
Top
9 10
11 12
13 14
1
AUX1 Shtl
ShtlA 1
1
3
5
7
5
4
6
8
2
ft
m
1x
2x
A 1
A 2
V
R
AM
14
13
8
5
6
7
2-3
2.1 Top
VTR
Frame Preset2
AUX1
AUX2
A/M
Frame Preset1
(User 0 9) (User A) (User A)
0 9 10
A
ON
AUX1
VTR VTR
AUX2 1
ON/OFF 2-14
VTR 2-16
AUX1 2-15
AUX2 2-17
3. MENU 3-1
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12[Trk]
A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]
MENUMENU
[ I-Tq ] [ I-Gain ]
[ Frm2 ]
[ Frm1 ]
AM
RET
Frame Preset2 2-22
2-12
2-29
A/M 2-28
2-25
Frame Preset1 2-19
RET 2-18
RET
1 /
ON/OFF
1 /
ON/OFF
A/M
2-4 2-5 2-6 2-9
2-26
[ Z.M. ]
13
14
5
7
6
8
2-4
2.2
2.2
[ ]
User 1 9 9 User 1 9
User 0 User 1 9User OFF User 0 3-26 User 0 F-Hold
User ( ) ( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
2-6 2-11
2-5
2.2 - (User 0 9)
(User 0 9) [ ]
Top User 0 9UserA User 0 9 MENU 3. MENU User A
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
Set
1
2
Set4
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 2
Top
SetMENU [ ] 1 Set
OFF
(D)
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
2-6
2.2 - (User A)
(User A)[ ]
User ( ) ( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
Unlock Lock
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Unlock
Lock Unlock 8
2-7
2.2 - (User A)
1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
Set
3
4
5
2 A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
Unlock
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
Top
MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set
OFF
(D)
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
(1)
[ ]
2-8
2.2 - (User A)
(D)
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
8
(D)
(D) Unlock Lock
MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set
Set Set
1
Unlock
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
Set
3
2 A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ ] A I G : 5 0
EnterPassword
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
4
Set
Set
5
SET
6
7 Lock
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
Top
(2)
[ ]
2-9
2.2 - (User A)
(User A) [ ]
Unlock Lock
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Unlock
(1)
1 IG: Set
[ ] A
3 Set
2
[A] [Lock]
I G : 50
I G : 55
[ ] A
I G : 5 0
I G : 5 5
SetSet
01 99
I G : 5 0
User ( ) ( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
2-10
2.2 - (User A)
(2)
1 Set
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3 Set
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
I :
(Unlock )
SetSet I G : 5 0
[ ]
2-11
2.2 - (User A)
1 Set
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
2
I :
EnterPassword
Set3
SET
Set4
Set
Set
5
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
(Lock )
Set Set Set Set
Set
(D)
8
I G : 5 0
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
[ ]
2-12
2.3 -
2
(1)
--> A/M AUTO
--> AUTO
3-6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Set
5 Set
4
I-Gain
Auto
A
Top
I-Gain
3
1
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 73
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 73
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 71
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
A
Set
01 99
MENU Set[ I-Gain ]
2.3 [ I-Gain ]
2-13
2.3 -
(2)
--> A/M AUTO
--> Remote
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Set
5 Set
4
I-Gain
Remote
A
Top
I-Gain
3 2
1
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 80 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
A
90
Set
01 99
MENU Set 2[ I-Gain ]
3-6
[ I-Gain ]
2-14
2.4 ON/OFF
ON/OFF
1
2
4
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
[Trk]OFF
[Trk]ON
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]ON Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ON OFF
Top
(D)
(D)
Set
OFF ON
MENU Set[Trk]OFF
2.4 ON/OFF
2-5 3-4
[Trk]
2-15
2.5 AUX1
AUX1
Set
1 2
2
Set4
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ShtlA 1
VTRA 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF VTR VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
Set
(D)
2
Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
MENU SetShtlA 1
2.5 AUX1
2-5 3-4
A 1
2-16
2.6 VTR
VTR
Set
1 2 1
2
Set4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl RETA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
VTRV
RETV
3
Top
2 Set
(D)
(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
MENU SetVTRV
2.6 VTR V
2-5 3-4
2-17
2.7 AUX2
AUX2
Set
1 3
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
ShtlA 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
FRM1A 2
ShtlA 2
Set4
3
Top
3 SetMENU SetA 1 FRM1A 2
(D)
Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR RETFraming Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
2.7 AUX2
2-5 3-4
A 2
2-18
2.8 RET
RET
Set
1 3 1
2
Set4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
RETR
FRM2R
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
FRM2R
[ ]MENU
3
Top
3 Set
(D)
(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTRRET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
MENU SetA 1 RETR
2.8 RET R
2-5 3-4
2-19
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1
(1) Frame Preset1
PRE3-42
1 4
2
3
4
Frame1
A
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
PRE FAST
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
R
(D)
(D)
Set
PRE FAST
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
2.9 Frame Preset1
2-5 3-4
[ Frm1 ]
2-20
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
(2) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
1 4
2
3
4
Zoom
ON OFF
5 A
Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
A
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON R
(D)
(D)
Set
ON OFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
[ Frm1 ]
2-5 3-4
2-21
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF "A"
(3) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A
A R Focus
1 4
2
3 2
Focus
5 A
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
4 ON
OFF
(D)
(D)
Set
ONOFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ] 2
[ Frm1 ]
2-5 3-4
2-22
2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2
(1) Frame Preset2
PRE3-42
1 4 1
2
3
4
Frame2
A
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
PRE FAST
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
R
(D)
(D)
Set
PRE FAST
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]
2.10 Frame Preset2
2-5 3-4
[ Frm2 ]
2-23
2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
(2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
1 4 1
2
3
4
Zoom
ON OFF
5 A
Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
A
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
R
(D)
(D)
Set
ON OFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]
[ Frm2 ]
2-5 3-4
2-24
2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
(3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A
A R Focus
1 4 1
2
3 2
Focus
5 A
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
4 ON
OFF
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
(D)
(D)
Set
ONOFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ] 2
[ Frm2 ]
2-5 3-4
2-25
2.11
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Set
4 Set
1 5
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] L
[ I-Tq ] H
[ I-Tq ] L
3 H L
Top
(D)
(D)
Set
H L
MENU Set5 [ I-Tq ] H
2.11
2-5 3-4
[ I-Tq ]
2-26
2.12 -
(1)
2
4
CurveMode
Seesaw
A
3
5
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
[ Z.M. ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Set
Set
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw: 5
5
[ ]
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
D5 5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
3 5
A
Top
CurveMode
1 5 1
D
[ Z.M. ]MENU Set Set5
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
(1)
(9)
MAX
2.12 [ Z.M. ]
2-5 3-4
2-27
2.12 -
(2)
2
4
CurveMode
A
3 2
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
Demand
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
[ Z.M. ]
1 5 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Set
Set
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw: 5
5
[ ]
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
D5
8 5
5
A
CurveMode
Top
[ Z.M. ] 2 SetMENU Set
D
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
5
(1)
(9)
MAX
[ Z.M. ]
2-5 3-4
2-28
2.13 A/M
A/M
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
ReveAM
Set
1 6
2
Set4
3
Top
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
NormAM
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
ReveAM
(D)
(D)
Set
Norm Reve
A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual
Auto Manu
Auto Only Manual Only
MENU Set6 NormAM
2.13 A/M AM
2-5 3-4
2-29
2.14
ZoomIris
1 2 MANUAL 3TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE 43-59
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Iris
Set
1 6 1
2
Set4
Zoom Iris
3
Top
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ]
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Iris [ Z.M. ]
(D)
(D)
Set
Zoom Iris
Zoom Iris
MENU Set6 Zoom
2.14
2-5 3-4
3-1
3 MENU
3-2
3.1 MENU
3.1 MENU
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1 [ ] A I G : 5 0
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1 Fol.
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Switch
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
User
MENU
Top
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset
: Go Top : Back
Go Top
Set
Set
Go Top
User
Top
Set
Set
1 2
3
4
56
7
8
Switch 3-27
Zoom 3-51
Info 3-67Preset 3-35
Focus 3-65
User 3-31
2
3
5
6
7
Iris 3-454 Fol. 3-758
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ] Zoom
CurveMode Focus [ ]
Focus
Info Encoder: Initialize
OFF
Info
(A)
(A )
(0 9)
(0 9)
User A (A) (0 9) User
CamSeri: ON
MENU 33 3 MENU User Switch Preset Iris Zoom Focus A Info Fol. 8 R 7 Top MENU Set User 7
MENU 8 MENU
Top Top
3-3
3.2 User
3.2 User
3
User 1 9 9 User 1 9
User 0 User 1 9User OFF User 0 3-26 User 0 F-Hold
User ( ) ( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
3-19 3-25
(User 0 9) ............................................................................................................3-4
........................................................................................................................3-5
(1) 1 ..............................................................................................3-6
(2) .............................................................................................3-7
1 1 .............................................................................3-8
(1) .......................................................3-10
(2) .......................................................3-12
(3) ................................................................................................................3-14
(User 0 9) ...........................................................................................................3-15
(User A) ...............................................................................................................3-19
(User A) ...............................................................................................................3-23
....................................................................................................................................3-26
Top
Top Top
Top
Top
3-4
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
(User 0 9)
User
Top
User
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3
No.
1 Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
2 2
SetMENU Set User 1
OFF
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
(D)
User 0 9User A User A3-19 3-25 User No.
Top
3-5
3.2 User -
2 2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Set
Set
Name User
Name:
1 1 -
Set5 Name
Name User
Name: A
1
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
A
User
Top
User
Name
4
Name
SetMENU
(D)
Set User 1 Set2
8
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
2-5 3-4
Top
3-6
3.2 User - 1
User
2 3
3
4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
User 1 Reset Now.
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
1 Set
Set
Reset
Set6
Reset
5 y
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
A
A
Top
User
Reset
Reset
Reset
ResetAll
SetMENU Set User 1 Set3
(1) 1 1
1 5
F-Hold
2-5 3-4
3-7
3.2 User -
User
2 3
3
4 2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
All User Reset Now.
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
1 Set
Set
Reset
Set6
Reset
5 y
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
A
A
Top
User
Reset
Reset
Reset
ResetAll
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
SetMENU Set User 1 Set3 2
(2)
1 5
F-Hold
3-8
3.2 User - 1 1
3
6
5
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
3 y/n
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
1 y/n
1 Set
2 4
4
Set
Copy y (YES), n (NO)
To No.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1 User
Copy
Top
User
A
Copy
Copy
1 7
2-5 3-4
1 1
3-9
3.2 User - 1 1
Set
MENU Set User 1 Set4
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
y
Set8 A
7
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
3 y/n
3-10
3.2 User -
1 3-12 2
(1)
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
1 Set
2 5
4
Set
Set
Connect y (YES), n (NO)
y (YES) 5
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1 User
ToOtherLens
Top
User
A
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
B
ToOtherLens
ToOtherLens
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
6 B
7
1 12
1. 20P-20P
20 2. 3.
2-5 3-4
3-11
3.2 User -
Set
SetMENU
Set
Set User 1 Set5
8
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
1 y/n
10
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 1
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
11
9 To No.
Copy y (YES), n (NO)
Set13
12
Now Data Copy Please Wait...
A ResetAll
User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
A
Set
y (YES)
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
2
1
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
1 Set
2
3-14 (3)
3-12
3.2 User -
(2)
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
1 Set
2 5
Set
4
Set
Connect y (YES), n (NO)
y (YES)
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1 User
ToOtherLens
Top
User
A
ToOtherLens
ToOtherLens
5
6
1 10
1. 20P-20P
20 2. 3.
3-13
3.2 User -
Set
AllCopy y (YES), n (NO)
B
y/n
9
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
AllCopy AllCopy
Copy y (YES), n (NO)
Set11
10
Now Data Copy Please Wait...
A ResetAll
User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
A
B
7 2
y (YES)
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
2
1
8
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n
Set
SetMENU Set User 1 Set
Set
5
2
1 Set
2
3-14 (3)
3-14
3.2 User -
(3)
Lens Connect Error!!
20P-20P 20P-20P
OFF
20P-20P SW
A
20P-20P
Copy Error!!
User Copy ToOtherLens
1
A
Access: Unlock
3-15
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
3-19 3-22
Lock
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 6
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User User
User Copy ToOtherLens
1
Access: Unlock Set3
Set1
Unlock Lock
[ ] Lock [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1 [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU
(User 0 9)
Lock Unlock 8
Lock (ShtlShot FramePreset PresetSpeed) ZoomTrack ON/OFF AutoIrisGain F-Hold
User No. 0 9 Unlock User No. Lock Lock
3-16
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
Set
(D)
Set Set Set6 DISPLAY
8
(D)
(D) Unlock Lock
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Set
Set
4
SET
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
5
6 Lock
User Copy
1
ToOtherLens Access: Lock
Lock Unlock 8
3-17
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
Unlock Unlock
Unlock 1
Set Set[ ] Lock
(D)
(D) Unlock Lock
2
[ ] 1
Top
1 MENU
MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ] Lock
MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
Set
Set
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
5
6 Lock User No.
3
Set4 Lock Unlock
(Lock User No.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ] Lock
[ ] Lock
3-18
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU [ ] Lock
2 6
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User User
1 Set
1
1
User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Lock
Set3
Set
Set
4 Lock Unlock
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
5
6 Unlock
User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Unlock
Unlock 2
SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY
3-19
3.2 User - (User A)
User ( ) ( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
Unlock Lock
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Unlock
(User A)
Lock Unlock 8
Top
3-20
3.2 User - (User A)
(1)
User
Top
User
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3 A
No.
Unlock
[ ] A I G : 5 0
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
1 Set
4 Set
5 Set
6
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
A A
SetMENU SetSet User 1
OFF
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
(D)
3-21
3.2 User - (User A)
(2)
User
Top
User
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3 A
No.
EnterPassword
Set6
SET
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
Set5
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
1 Set
4 Set
Unlock
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
A A
3-22
3.2 User - (User A)
8 Lock
[ ] LockI G : 5 0
Set7
Set
(D)
Set DISPLAY
8
(D)
(D) Unlock Lock
OFF
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
SetMENU SetSet User 1
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Lock Unlock 8
3-23
3.2 User - (User A)
Unlock Lock
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Unlock
(1)
1 IG: Set
[ ] A
3 Set
2
[A] [Lock]
I G : 50
I G : 55
[ ] A
I G : 5 0
I G : 5 5
SetSet
01 99
I G : 5 0
User ( ) ( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
(User A) Top
3-24
3.2 User -- (User A)
(2)
1 Set
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3 Set
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
I :
(Unlock )
SetSet I G : 5 0
3-25
3.2 User -- (User A)
1 Set
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
2
I :
EnterPassword
Set3
SET
Set4
Set
Set
5
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
(Lock )
Set Set Set Set
Set
(D)
8
I G : 5 0
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1
User User0 User 0 Reset Now User1 9 Escape To User 0
Set
2 Top
User 0 Reset Now
User 0
Escape To User 0
User 1 9
Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
2SetandDISPLAY[ ]
User 0 9 User A User 0
(1) User 0 9
(2) User A ( )
1 Set
2 Top
Escape To User 0 Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3.2 User -
3-26
F-Hold
Lock
3-27
AUX1 ............................................................................................... 3-28
AUX2 ............................................................................................... 3-29
VTR ................................................................................................. 3-30
RET ................................................................................................. 3-31
A/M ........................................................................................................ 3-32
......................................................................................................... 3-33
Top Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
3.3 Switch
3.3 Switch
3-28
3.3 Switch -AUX1
(D)
Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
MENU Set Switch 1
Switch
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Set
AUX1
Switch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2 FRM1 Shtl
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2 FRM1 VTR
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
AUX1
AUX1
2-5 3-4
Top
3-29
3.3 Switch -AUX2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch
2 2
3
1 Set
AUX2
Switch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2
Shtl FRM1
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2
Shtl Sped
(D)
Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR RETFraming Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
2MENU Set Switch 1
AUX2
AUX2
2-5 3-4
Top
3-30
3.3 Switch -VTR
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
RET:R RET
AUX2:A 2
VTR:V
FRM1 VTR
Switch 1
RET:R RET
AUX2:A 2
VTR:V
FRM1 RET
Switch
2 3
3
1 Set
VTR
Switch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
3MENU Set Switch 1
(D)
(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR RET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
VTR
VTR
2-5 3-4
Top
3-31
3.3 Switch -RET
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch
2 4
3
1 Set
RET
Switch
Top
Switch 1
A/M:AM Normal
VTR:V
RET:R
VTR RET
Switch 1
A/M:AM Normal
VTR:V
RET:R
VTR Sped
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
4MENU Set Switch 1
(D)
(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTRRET Framing Preset1 Framing Preset2 Speed Preset
RET
RET
2-5 3-4
Top
3-32
3.3 Switch - A/M
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET
Zoom Normal
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET
Zoom Revers
Switch
2 5
3
1 Set
AM
Switch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
5MENU Set Switch 1
(D)
(D)Normal Revers
A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual
Auto Manual
Auto Only Manual Only
A/M
A/M
2-5 3-4
Top
3-33
3.3 Switch -
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET Normal
Zoom
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET Normal
Iris
Switch
2 6
3
1 Set
SSaw
Switch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
6MENU Set Switch 1
(D)
(D)Zoom Iris
Zoom Iris
ZoomIris
1 2 MANUAL
AUTO / REMOTE
3 TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE 4 3-59
2-5 3-4
Top
3-35
Frame Preset1 ................................................................................. 3-36
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 3-37
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF "A" ........................................ 3-38
Frame Preset2 ................................................................................. 3-39
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ....................................................................................... 3-40
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF "A" ........................................ 3-41
....................................................................................... 3-42
........................................................................................... 3-43
........................................................................................... 3-44
Top Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
3.4 Preset
3.4 Preset
3-36
3.4 Preset -Frame Preset1
Preset
2
3
4
5
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
Preset
A
A
Frame1
Frame1
PRE FAST
R
1 2Set
Set
Set
Frame1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
A
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
(D)
(D)PRE FAST
Set Set2 PresetMENU Set
PRE3-42
Frame Preset1
2-5 3-4
Top
3-37
3.4 Preset -Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
1 2Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset
4
5
Top
Preset
A
A
Frame1
Frame1
ON OFF
Set
Frame1 Zoom
A
R
(D)
(D)
Set Set2 PresetMENU Set
ON OFF
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
2-5 3-4
Top
3-38
3.4 Preset -Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
2
3 2
1 2Set
Set
Preset
4
5
Top
Preset
A
A
Frame1
Frame1
ON OFF
Set
Frame1 Focus
A
(D)
(D)
Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set
OFF ON
A R Focus
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A
2-5 3-4
Top
3-39
3.4 Preset -Frame Preset2
[ ]
Preset
2 2
3
4
5
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
Preset
A
A
Frame2
Frame2
PRE FAST
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
FAST
1 2Set
Set
Set
Frame2
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
A
Frame2: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
R
(D)
(D)PRE FAST
Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set
PRE3-42
Frame Preset2
2-5 3-4
Top
3-40
3.4 Preset -Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
2 2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
1 2Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset
4
5
Top
Preset
A
A
Frame2
Frame2
ON OFF
Set
Frame2 Zoom
A
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
R
(D)
(D)
Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set
ON OFF
2-5 3-4
Top
3-41
3.4 Preset -Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
2 2
3 2
1 2Set
Set
Preset
4
5
Top
Preset
A
A
Frame2
Frame2
ON OFF
Set
Frame2 Focus
A
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
(D)
(D)
Set Set2 2 2PresetMENU Set
OFF ON
A R Focus
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A
2-5 3-4
Top
3-42
3.4 Preset -
2 3
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 2Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
500
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset
Top
Preset
ZSpeed
(D)
(D)
2 3PresetMENU Set
001 800
Memo 2
Frame1,Frame2
2-5 3-4
3-43
3.4 Preset -
2 4
3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: D99
91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 50
91
5
1 2Set
Set
Start
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset
Top
Preset
A
ZMovement
ZMovement
ZMovement
A
(D)
(D)
2 4PresetMENU Set Set Set
00 99
2-5 3-4
3-44
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
91
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
D91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
70
2 4
3
4 2
6
5
1 2Set
Set
Stop
Set
Preset
Top
Preset
A
ZMovement
ZMovement
ZMovement
A
91
2 24PresetMENU Set Set Set
00 99
3.4 Preset -
2-5 3-4
3-45
(1) .................................................................................................... 3-46
(2) .................................................................................................... 3-47
.................................................................................................................... 3-48
ON/OFF ............................................................................................................ 3-49
ON/OFF .............................................................................................. 3-50
Top Top
Top
Top
Top
3.5 Iris
3.5 Iris
3-46
3.5 Iris -
2
(1)
Iris
Top
Iris
[I-Gain]
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 3
4
Set
3
Set
Set
A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 55
[ ]
5
Auto
[I-Gain]
2 I-Gain
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Comp: ON Torque: High
[ ]
Set Set2 3 SetMENU
01 99
Iris [ ]
--> A/M AUTO
--> AUTO
3-6
Top
3-47
3.5 Iris -
Iris
Top
Iris
[I-Gain]
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 3
4 2
Set
3
Set
Set
A
52
5
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto:
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 93 Auto: 52
[ ]
Remote
[I-Gain]
2 I-Gain
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Comp: ON Torque: High
[ ]
Set Set2 3 2 SetMENU
90
01 99
Iris [ ]
(2)
--> A/M AUTO
--> Remote
3-6
3-48
3.5 Iris -
Iris
Top
Iris
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 3
3
Set
2 2
High Low
Torque
[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]
Torque: Comp: ON
High
[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]
Torque: Comp: ON
Low
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
High Low
Set 2 3 2
(D)
(D)
MENU Iris [ ]
2-5 3-4
Top
3-49
3.5 Iris - ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Iris
Top
Iris
[ -Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
Comp ON
1 3
3
Set
2 3 Comp
ON OFF
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Close: OFF
Torque: High ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Torque: High
OFF
ON OFF
Set 2 3 3
(D)
(D)
MENU Iris [ ]
2.0xIRIS 2F
ON 2.0x ON/OFF ON
2-5 3-4
3-50
Iris
Top
Iris
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Comp ON
1 3
3
Set
2 4 Close
ON OFF
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Torque: High
ON Close: OFF
Iris [ ]
Comp: Close:
Torque: High ON ON
OFF ON
Set 2 3 4
(D)
(D)
MENU Iris [ ]
ON 2.0x
ON
OFF
3.5 Iris - ON/OFF
ON/OFF
2-5 3-4
3-51
ON/OFF ........................................................................................................ 3-52
F-Hold ON/OFF ...................................................................................................................... 3-53
...................................................................................................... 3-54
...................................................................................................... 3-55
...................................................................................................... 3-56
............................................................................................................. 3-57
.................................................................................................. 3-58
....................................................................................... 3-59
....................................................................................... 3-60
............................................................................................... 3-61
/ ......................................... 3-62
.................................................................................................................... 3-63
Top Top
Top
Top
Top
3.6 Zoom
3.6 Zoom
3-52
3.6 Zoom - ON/OFF
Zoom
Top
Zoom
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 4Set
2
ON OFF
Tracking
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF OFF
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] ON OFF
(D)
(D) OFF ON
Set 2 4MENU Zoom [ ]
ON/OFF
2-5 3-4
Top
3-53
3.6 Zoom -F-Hold ON/OFF
Zoom
Top
Zoom
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 4Set
2 2
ON OFF
F-Hold
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF OFF
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF ON
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
(D)
(D) OFF ON
F-Hold F-Hold
Set 2 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]
F-Hold / F-Hold 0
F-Hold 3-6
F-Hold OFF OFF
F-Hold ON
F-Hold ON/OFF
3-54
3.6 Zoom -
Zoom
Top
Zoom
Movement
A
3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 3
Movement
Movement
Start
A
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
97 91
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
D99 91
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
(D)
(D) 00 99
Set SetSet2 4 3MENU Zoom [ ]
2-5 3-4
3-55
3.6 Zoom -
Top
Movement 3
4 2
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 3 Movement
Stop
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
D91 99
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
89 99
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
Zoom
A
Zoom
Movement
A
91
00 99
Set SetSet2 4 3 2MENU Zoom [ ]
2-5 3-4
3-56
3.6 Zoom -
Movement 3
4 3
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5
Zoom
A
Movement
A
Zoom
Top
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 3 Movement
End
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
D99 99
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
97 99
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
(D)
(D) 00 99
Set SetSet2 4 3 3MENU Zoom [ ]
2-5 3-4
3-57
3.6 Zoom -
CurveMode 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5 5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5
Zoom
A
CurveNode
A
Zoom
Top
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 4
Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj
Zoom [ ]
OFF
CurveMode
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
Seesaw
D5
7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
D
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
Set SetSet2 4 4MENU Zoom [ ]
(1)
(9)
MAX
2-5 3-4
Top
3-58
3.6 Zoom -
CurveMode 3
4 2
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5 5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 4
Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj
Zoom [ ]
OFF
CurveMode
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
Demand
D5
7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ] Zoom
A
CurveMode
A
Zoom
Top
D
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
Set SetSet2 4 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]
(1)
(9)
MAX
2-5 3-4
Top
3-59
3.6 Zoom -
SpeedAdj 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 01
R
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 5
*
SpeedAdj
Max
* D
CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped
Zoom [ ]
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
D99 01
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
97 01
Zoom
A
SpeedAdj
A
Zoom
Top
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
99
Min 99
Set SetSet2 4 5MENU Zoom [ ]
Max
2-5 3-4
3-60
3.6 Zoom -
SpeedAdj 3
4 2
5 2
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 01
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
1 4Set
Set
Set
2 5
*
CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped
Zoom [ ]
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
03 99
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 D01
SpeedAdj
Min
* D
Zoom
A
SpeedAdj
A
Zoom
Top
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
01
01 Max
Set SetSet2 4 5 2MENU Zoom [ ]
Min
2-5 3-4
3-61
3.6 Zoom -
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Zoom
Zoom
Top
1 4Set
2 6
SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON
Zoom [ ]
Sped
SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON
Zoom [ ]
Posi
Control
Sped Posi
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
(D)
(D)Sped Posi
Set 2 4 6MENU Zoom [ ]
Posi Posi 1
Sped
2-5 3-4
3-62
3.6 Zoom - /
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Zoom
Zoom
Top
1 4Set
2 7 VR-Dem
ON OFF
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M
Zoom [ ]
OFF Sped
(D)
(D) ON OFF
Set 2 4 7MENU Zoom [ ]
/
2-5 3-4
3-63
3.6 Zoom -
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Zoom
Zoom
Top
1 4Set
2 8 DType
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Control: VR-Dem: DType:
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
300M
Control: VR-Dem: DType:
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
300A
(D)
(D)300M 300A
ZSD-300M ZSD-300A
Set 2 5 8MENU Zoom [ ]
VTR 2 300M
ZSD-300AZGA-200A300A
2-5 3-4
3-65
A .................................................................. 3-66
3.7 Focus
3.7 Focus
3-66
5
1 9
Set Set Set2MENU Focus [ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Focus [ ] CurveMode
CurveMode 3
4
6
Set
Set
ADemand
ADemand: 5
Focus [ ] CurveMode
CurveMode ADemand: D5
Focus [ ]
CurveMode ADemand: 7
Focus [ ]
5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Focus
A
CurveMode
A
Focus
Top
1 2Set
2 CurveMode
CurveMode Focus [ ]
Stan da
rd
1
9
SW SW FAR
3.7 Focus - A
A
2-5 3-4
3-67
3.8 Info
........................................................................................................................... 3-68
...................................................................................................................................... 3-69
/ ................................................................................................... 3-71
........................................................................................................................ 3-72
3.8 Info
3-68
3.8 Info -
Zoom Focus
3
Info
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 Encoder
ON OFF
1 2Set
Encoder: OFF Initialize
Info
Encoder: INDOFF
INDON
Initialize
Info
Encoder: Initialize CamSeri:
Info
CamSeri:
CamSeri: ON
ON
ON
(D)
(D)
2Set
OFF ON
MENU Info 1
3-69
3.8 Info -
ON OFF ( ) ON Manual OFF
/
ON
ON OFF
OFF
ZOOM
/
ON
ON OFF
OFF
FOCUS
1 Fol 2
3 ON
4FOCUS
5 6OFF
7
Initialize
Error!
/
3-70
3.8 Info -
4 Zoom
2 Focus
5
6
Info
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 2 Initialize
Zoom Focus
ON OFF
1 2Set
3 Set
Encoder: OFF
OFF Initialize
Info
Encoder: Info
Initialize Info
OFF OFF
Zoom: Focus:
Initialize Info
OFF Zoom: Focus:
OFF
Initialize Info
OFF Zoom: Focus:
ON
Initialize CamSeri: ON
CamSeri: ON
2 2
POWER OFF POWER ON
Set SetMENU Info
3-71
3.8 Info - /
2
User
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 6
1 Set
Info
3 3 CamSeri
4 ON OFF
Info
OFF
User
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Encoder: OFF
ON
Info
Initialize CamSeri:
Info
CamSeri: Initialize
ON
CamSeri: Initialize
Adjust
Adjust
(D)
(D) ON OFF
3Set 6MENU Info
/
3-72
3.8 Info -
IrisZoomFocus
3
4
5 Iris
2 Zoom
3 Focus
Info
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 4 Adjust
1 2
Set
Set
Camera Fol
Set
EnterPassword
Set
Encoder: OFF Initialize
Info
Initialize Info
Adjust Camera Fol
CamSeri:
Adjust
Iris: Zoom: Focus:
Camera Fol
EnterPassword
ON
CamSeri: ON
3-73
3.8 Info -
7
6
8
9 DISPLAY
Set
Set
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
37150 26910
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
26910
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
26910
37150
37190
1 2 3 OFF 4 9 OFF 5
00000 65530
Set
MENU
Set Set
DISPLAY
Set
Set
42
N
Info Adjust
Camera Fol
Camera Fol
Iris
Zoom
Focus
F2. 8 F16
: 00000 (37150) 65530 : 00000 (26910) 65530
Wide Tele
: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530
Near Far
: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530
3-75
3.9 Fol.
Iris, Zoom, Focus .......................................................................................... 3-76
3.9 Fol.
3-76
Fol. 1SetMENU
Fol.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
1 SetFol.
Top
Iris, Zoom, Focus 0 1000
Fol. 2
3.9 Fol. - Iris, Zoom, Focus
Iris, Zoom, Focus
4-1
4
4-2
Top
MENU
[ ]
[ Trk ]
A 1
V
A 2
R
[ Frm1 ]
[ Frm2 ]
AM
[ I-Tq ]
1
3
4
VTR
Shtl
OFF
1
RET
FRM1
Norm
Zoom
H
Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0
2-25
2-19~2-21
2-22~2-24
2-28
2-29
2-4
1-3
2-14
2-15
2-16
2-17
2-18
[ Z.M. ]
2 2-26,2-27
OFF / ON
VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl
FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET
RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR
Norm / Reve / Auto / Manu
Zoom / Iris
H / L
3-26Display SW Set 2User 0
[ I-Gain ]
5 2-12,2-13
4-3
MENU
Zoom Focus
Iris Zoom Focus
User
Go Top
No. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9
y/n y/n
y/n y/n
/ / A Z / a z / 0 9 Name Reset
User AllUser
AllCopy
Zoom Focus
Zoom Focus
Start Stop
To No
Copy
Copy
AUX1 AUX2
Frame1
Frame2
ZSpeed ZMovement
VTR RET A/M SSaw
Switch
Preset
Auto Remote
[I-Gain]
Torque Comp Close
Iris
Seesaw Demand
Start Stop
Max Min
Tracking F-Hold
CurveMode
Movement
SpeedAdj
Control VR-Dem DType
Zoom
Focus CurveMode ADemand
#1
#2
#3
6
3
4
5
2
1
6
Iris Zoom Focus
Fol.
Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped
VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET
RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR Nomal / Revers / Auto / Manual Zoom / Iris
Shtl
VTR FRM1
Unlock Unlock/Lock
1
n y
y/ny
n n
1
RET Nomal Zoom
PRE / FASTPRE
001 ~ 800800
PRE / FASTPRE
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
High / Low ON / OFF
High
ON OFF / ONOFF
OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF
Sped / PosiSped ON / OFFON
OFF / ONOFF
OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF
< >
< >
< >
300M / 300A 300M
(0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)
00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530
(**)
1 ~ 9 1 ~ 9
5 5
00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99
99 91
End 00 ~ 9999
Min 99 01 ~ Max
99
1 ~ 95
01
99 91
01 ~ 99 01 ~ 9990
1
6
1
[ ]
Encoder Initialize
Adjust
Info
UserCopy To Other Lens Access
( )
#1~3 R
< >
Set
3-4 3-5
3-2
3-6 3-7
3-8
3-9 3-10,3-11 3-12,3-13
3-15~3-18 3-28 3-29 3-30 3-31 3-32 3-33
3-36 3-37 3-38 3-39 3-40 3-41
3-42
3-43 3-44
3-46 3-47
3-48 3-49 3-50
3-52 3-53
3-54 3-55 3-56
3-57 3-58
3-59 3-60 3-61 3-62 3-63
3-66
3-68
3-70 3-70
3-76 3-76 3-76
3-72 3-72 3-72
CamSeri ON/OFF ON 3-71
FO R
E W
O R
D
ENGLISH VERSION
SC RE
EN CO
NF IG
ER AT
IO N
LI ST
O F
SE TT
IN G
TO P
S C
R E
E N
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
FCC REGULATIONS
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures: -- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. -- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. -- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected. -- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Do not make any changes or modifications to the equipment unless otherwise specified in the manual. If such changes or modifications should be made, you could be required to stop operation of the equipment.
Canadian Radio Interference Regulations
CAN ICES-3(B)/NMB-3(B)
We, Canon Inc., in Japan and CANON EUROPE LTD., in U.K., confirm that the BCTV zoom lens is conformity with the essential requirements of EC Directive(s) by applying the following standards: EN55103-1 and EN55103-2
Note: a) Applicable Electromagnetic Environments: E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3 (urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC
environment, ex. TV studio). b) Use of shielded cable is required to comply with limits specified by above standards.
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway, Iceland, and Liechtenstein)
This symbol indicates that this product is not to be disposed of with your household waste, according to the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU) and national legislation. This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment (EEE). Improper handling of this type of waste could have a possible negative impact on the environment and human health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated with EEE. At the same time, your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will contribute to the effective usage of natural resources. For more information
about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling, please contact your local city office, waste authority, approved WEEE scheme or your household waste disposal service. For more information regarding return and recycling of WEEE products, please visit www.canon-europe.com/weee.
Dieses Produkt ist zum Gebrauch im Wohnbereich, Geschafts- und Gewerbebereich sowie in Kleinbetrieben vorgesehen.
..
E1
Thank you for purchasing the Canon BCTV zoom lens.
This lens comes with operation manuals: Lens Manual and Information Display CD-ROM, and Poket Guide. Information Display Manual contains the operation method and operation procedure of the information display. Please refer to the Information Display Manual when it is needed.
FOREWORD
FO R
E W
O R
D
E2
FOREWORD CONTENTS........................................................................................................................................ E2
GENERAL.SAFETY.INFORMATION................................................................................................. E5
How.This.Operation.Manual.Is.Laid.Out......................................................................................... E9
Getting.to.Know.the.Names.of.the.Parts.......................................................................................E11
Basic.Operating.Procedure............................................................................................................ E12
1...Screen.Configuration 1.1 Screen Configuration................................................................................................................. E1-2
Top screen ................................................................................................................................................... E1-2 MENU screen .............................................................................................................................................. E1-3
2..Top.Screen 2.1 Top Screen ................................................................................................................................ E2-2
2.2 Users ......................................................................................................................................... E2-4 User selection (User 0 to 9) ......................................................................................................................... E2-5
Analog mode settings (User A) ............................................................................................................... E2-6 Analog mode operations (User A) ........................................................................................................... E2-9
2.3 Iris gain setting ........................................................................................................................ E2-12 (1) Auto iris gain setting ..................................................................................................................... E2-12 (2) Remote iris gain setting ................................................................................................................ E2-13
2.4 Zoom track function ON/OFF selection ................................................................................... E2-14
2.5 Function allocation to AUX1 switch ......................................................................................... E2-15
2.6 Function allocation to VTR switch ........................................................................................... E2-16
2.7 Function allocation to AUX2 switch ......................................................................................... E2-17
2.8 Function allocation to RET switch ........................................................................................... E2-18 2.9 Frame Preset1 settings ........................................................................................................... E2-19
(1) Frame Preset1 preset speed setting ............................................................................................ E2-19 (2) Frame Preset1 zoom ON/OFF selection ...................................................................................... E2-20 (3) Frame Preset1 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only) ....................................................... E2-21
2.10 Frame Preset2 settings ......................................................................................................... E2-22 (1) Frame Preset2 preset speed setting ............................................................................................ E2-22 (2) Frame Preset2 zoom ON/OFF selection ...................................................................................... E2-23 (3) Frame Preset2 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only) ....................................................... E2-24
2.11 Iris torque setting ................................................................................................................... E2-25
2.12 Zoom curve mode setting ...................................................................................................... E2-26 (1) Seesaw switch curve characteristics setting ................................................................................ E2-26 (2) Analog demand curve characteristics setting ............................................................................... E2-27
2.13 Iris A/M switch setting ............................................................................................................ E2-28
2.14 Function allocation to seesaw switch .................................................................................... E2-29
CONTENTS
CONTENTS
E3
3..MENU.Screen 3.1 MENU Screen ........................................................................................................................... E3-2
3.2 User Screen .............................................................................................................................. E3-3 User selection (User 0 to 9) ......................................................................................................................... E3-4 Giving names to the users ........................................................................................................................... E3-5 Resetting ..................................................................................................................................................... E3-6
(1) Resetting the settings for one user .................................................................................................... E3-6 (2) Resetting the settings for all the users .............................................................................................. E3-7
Copying the settings established for one user to another user ................................................................... E3-8 Copying data between lenses ................................................................................................................... E3-10
(1) Copying the data settings established for one user into another lens ............................................. E3-10 (2) Copying the data settings established for all the users into another lens ........................................ E3-12 (3) When an error display has appeared .............................................................................................. E3-14
Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)............................................................................................................... E3-15 Analog mode settings (User A) .................................................................................................................. E3-19 Analog mode operations (User A) ............................................................................................................. E3-23 Escape operation....................................................................................................................................... E3-26
3.3 Switch Screen ......................................................................................................................... E3-27 Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch ................................................................................................... E3-28 Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch ................................................................................................... E3-29 Allocating a function to the VTR switch ..................................................................................................... E3-30 Allocating a function to the RET switch ..................................................................................................... E3-31 Setting the iris A/M switch.......................................................................................................................... E3-32 Allocating a function to the seesaw switch ................................................................................................ E3-33
3.4 Preset Screen.......................................................................................................................... E3-35 Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed ................................................................................................... E3-36 Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF ........................................................................................ E3-37 Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF ("A" type lens only) ......................................................... E3-38 Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed ................................................................................................... E3-39 Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF ........................................................................................ E3-40 Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF ("A" type lens only) ......................................................... E3-41 Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode .............................................................................................. E3-42 Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations...................................................................... E3-43 Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations ...................................................................... E3-44
3.5 Iris Screen ............................................................................................................................... E3-45 Iris gain setting .......................................................................................................................................... E3-46
(1) Auto iris gain setting ........................................................................................................................ E3-46 (2) Remote iris gain setting ................................................................................................................... E3-47
Setting the iris torque................................................................................................................................. E3-48 Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF .................................................................................................... E3-49 Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF ............................................................................................ E3-50
3.6 Zoom Screen ........................................................................................................................... E3-51 Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF ........................................................................................................ E3-52 Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF ..................................................................................................................... E3-53 Setting the zoom servo start characteristics .............................................................................................. E3-54 Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics .............................................................................................. E3-55 Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics ............................................................................. E3-56 Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch ............................................................................. E3-57 Setting the analog demand curve characteristics ...................................................................................... E3-58
CONTENTS
FO R
E W
O R
D
E4
CONTENTS
Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control ............................................................................. E3-59 Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control .............................................................................. E3-60 Setting the servo type from the zoom demand .......................................................................................... E3-61 Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand ....................................................... E3-62 Setting the zoom demand specifications ................................................................................................... E3-63
3.7 Focus Screen .......................................................................................................................... E3-65 Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only) ...................................................................... E3-66
3.8 Info Screen .............................................................................................................................. E3-67 Encoder output setting............................................................................................................................... E3-68 Initialize operation setting .......................................................................................................................... E3-69 Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF ........................................................................... E3-71 Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage ............................................................................................................ E3-72
3.9 Fol. Screen .............................................................................................................................. E3-75 Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus) .......................................................................................... E3-76
4..List.of.Setting
Index...........................................................................................................................End
E5
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
FO R
E W
O R
D
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
The safety warnings and cautions provided on the product or its operation manual must be observed. Failure to observe these warnings and cautions provided to guard against hazards may result in injury or accident. Read this operation manual carefully to familiarize yourself with its contents and ensure that you can operate the product properly. Also, store this manual in a safe place where it can be easily reached whenever re- quired.
This operation manual uses the following symbols and terms to iden- tify hazards to protect you and others by aiming to prevent the occurrence of accidents.
WARNING This indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not heeded, may result in death or serious injury to you or others. Be sure to heed all warning notices to ensure safe operation at all times.
CAUTION Indicates hazardous situations which, if not heeded, may result in minor or moderate injury to you or other persons, or damages to your property.
(NOTE) Emphasizes essential information which, if not heeded, may render the product unworkable or cause it to function improperly. Also, provides helpful information for operation.
E6
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
HANDLING THE PRODUCT
WARNING 1. Never allow water to enter or be spilled on the product. Immediately stop using the product if water
enters the product. Otherwise, a fire or electric shock hazard may result.
2. Do not stare at the sun or other source of high-intensity light through the lens. Doing so may result in injury to your eyes.
CAUTION 1. Do not drop the lens when transporting it or when attaching or detaching it to or from the camera head.
The lens may fall, possibly causing injury.
2. Make sure all mountings are tightened securely. If any of these mountings becomes loose, the lens may fall, possibly causing injury.
3. Always grasp the connector itself when connecting or disconnecting the lens cable. Pulling on the cable portion may result in damage to the cable, such as breakage of the conductors. Power leaking from a damaged cable may present a fire or electric shock hazard.
4. Inspect all mountings periodically (about every 6 months to 1 year) to make sure they are securely tightened, and tighten any loose portions. Otherwise, the lens may fall, possibly causing injury.
5. If it becomes necessary to repair this product, or to perform any operations or adjustments not men- tioned in this operation manual, contact Canons representative or the dealer who originally supplied the lens.
(NOTE) 1. Protect the lens from strong impacts of shocks. Striking or dropping the lens may result in a malfunc-
tion.
2. This lens is not completely waterproof, so avoid exposing it directly to rain or snow. When the lens must be used in rain or snow, provisions should be made to prevent the lens from get- ting wet.
3. Under dusty conditions, the lens should be mounted or dismounted with a cover placed over the mount so as to prevent dust from entering into the interior.
4. Do not bring the lens, kept in a very cold ambient temperature, into a warm room, because the lens may fog on the inside or condensation may occur. In these cases, the lens cannot be used until these problems clear. If the lens must be used under such conditions, countermeasures are recommended. (For instance, before bringing the lens into a warm room, put it in a vinyl bag with an effective desic- cant, and then bring it into the room. After the temperature acclimatizes to the same level as the room temperature, take out the lens out of the vinyl bag.)
5. If the lens is to be used in adverse environments, such as in a chemical laden atmosphere, consult with Canons representative beforehand.
E7
GENERAL SAFETY INFORMATION
FO R
E W
O R
D
WARNING 1. Should any of the abnormalities described below occur, immediately unplug the lens cable from the
camera, and then contact Canons representative or the dealer from whom you purchased the lens. Smoke, abnormal smell, or abnormal noise. Entry of foreign objects (including metals and liquids) inside the products.
WARNING 1. Unplug the lens cable and remove the lens from the camera, before attempting to clean the lens.
Never use flammable substances such as benzene or thinner for cleaning, as this may present a seri- ous fire or electric shock hazard.
(NOTE) 1. Dust or fingerprints on the lens surface.
Gently blow or brush away dust or dirt on the lens surface using a lens blower or a soft lens brush. Re- move any fingerprints or other stains with a clean cotton cloth moistened with commercially available lens cleaning fluid or lens cleaning paper. Gently swirl the cloth or cleaning paper over the lens surface, starting at the center area of the lens, and then circling gradually outward until whole lens surface has been covered. Be careful not to rub dust across the lens, as the lens surface may be scratched.
2. Periodic inspection A periodic inspection about once a year is recommended. The inspection and maintenance interval depends on the operating conditions, the frequency of use, and the environment. If required, overhaul the lens.
CAUTION 1. Always attach the lens cap (or hood cap) and the dust cap before storing the lens.
Storing the lens without these caps attached may present a fire hazard. (Very bright light, such as sun- light, may be focused by the lens and cause a fire.)
(NOTE) 1. Moisture inside the lens
If the lens becomes damp because of use in fog, mist or drizzle, wipe off the moisture with a soft dry cloth and seal the lens together with an efficient desiccant in a vinyl bag to remove moisture which has entered into the interior.
DEALING WITH ABNORMALITIES
MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION
STORAGE
E8
TO THE CUSTOMER
TO THE CUSTOMER
1. Canon shall bear no responsibility for damage resulting from improper operation of this product by the customer.
2. Canon shall make no guarantees about the product quality, functions, or operation manual and its marketability and suitability for the customer's purpose. Moreover, Canon shall bear no responsibility for any damage, direct or incidental, that results from us- age for the customer's purpose.
3. Canon shall make no guarantees about the results obtained using this product.
4. The product specifications, configuration, and appearance are subject to change without prior notice.
5. For further information on repairs, maintenance, or adjustments not mentioned in this operation manual, contact your Canon dealer or your Canon sales representative.
6. Note that Canon may be unable to undertake servicing or repair of a product if it is modified without consulting Canon or your Canon sales representative.
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Canon Europe Ltd. 3 The Square, Stockley Park, Uxbridge, Middlesex,UB11 1ET UK
All rights reserved. No part of this operation manual may be reproduced or copied in any form or by any means without the written permission of Canon Inc.
E9
How this operation manual is laid out
How This Operation Manual Is Laid Out
2.9 Frame Preset1 settings
(1) Frame Preset1 preset speed setting
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
1 Move the key four times.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key or key.
4 Push the key.
The item is now highlighted.
*
*
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
PRESelection item
Function
FAST
Operation at the preset speed
Operation at the maximum speed
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 preset speed setting
E 2-19
List of functions or items which can be selected
Operation procedure
Checkpoint
Outline of function and checkpoints
Quick reference for operation procedure
Page number
Function title
Function title and outline of functions
This makes it possible to select whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
Note: If {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)
[ Frm1 ]
Section title
IMPORTANT
TO PS
C R
EE N
The display is switched to the Preset screen, and an underline appears below [Frame1]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
Setting Operation Procedure Page
FO R
E W
O R
D
E10
How this operation manual is laid out
Stylistic feature Explanation
{ }
[ ]
screen* *
R Type
A Type
Example
The A type lens only.
With the R type lens.
An underline appears at [Frame1].
Select {FAST}.
The Top screen appears.
IASE lens indicated as A type.
IRSE lens indicated as R type.
The name of the screen is indicated by underlining.
The name of a setting item is indicated within the [ ] square brackets.
The name of an item or function to be selected is indicated by the { } set of parentheses.
Type
Manual
Zoom
Focus
Operation modeOperation
Servo / Manual
Manual (with built-in motor for servo)
Zoom
Focus
Servo / Manual
A Type
R Type
Refer to the table below for the product models that correspond to the major lens types featured in the text.
Classification of major lens types featured in the text
E11
Getting to know the names of the parts
Getting to Know the Names of the Parts
DISPLAY
DISPLAY switch Push this to show the display. When it is pushed once, the display is turned on; when it is pushed again, the display is turned off.
Display This appears when the DISPLAY switch is pushed. If two or more minutes are allowed to elapse without any operation being performed, the display turns off automatically.
Digital function selector This key is used to perform all the setting operations on the display. Depending on the operation method, one of its five functions may be set. (Refer to Control key names and operation methods in the table below.)
OperationName Detailed description How the key's operation is represented
PUSH
This key is pushed when { } has appeared on the screen
display or when a selection is to be entered. keySet
key
Set key
Right key
Left key
Up key
Down key
key
Push
Move right
Move left
key
key
Move up
Move down
The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared
on the screen display.
The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared
on the screen display.
The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared
on the screen display.
The operation of this key takes effect when { } has appeared
on the screen display.
Names of the parts
Control key names and operation methods
FO R
E W
O R
D
Basic Operating Procedure
Basic operating procedure
Note: For details on how to turn on the power of the lens, refer to the cameras Operation Manual.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Push the DISPLAY switch.
The display lights up.
The display is turned off.
The changes made are stored in the memory.
Turn on the power of the lens.
Push the DISPLAY switch.
Use the control key to perform the settings.
1
2
3
4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Details of how to set the setting items are given on page E2-2 and following.
Checkpoint: If the control key is not operated for 2 or more minutes, the display turns off automatically. (Auto OFF) However, while the Fol. screen is shown, the display will not turn off automatically no matter how many minutes elapse. It is turned off only by pushing the DISPLAY switch.
Checkpoint: Even when the display is turned off by AUTO OFF, the changes made to the settings are stored in the memory just as when the display is turned off by pushing the DISPLAY switch.
Note: The changes made to the setting will be stored in the memory and turned off by pushing the DISPLAY switch while the display is shown .
Note: In the case of the power of the lens turned off while the display is shown, the changes made to the setting may not be stored in the memory.
E12
To restore the original settings The initial factory settings can be restored at times when, for instance, settings have been performed incorrectly or as a trial. For details, see Resetting on page E3-6.
IMPORTANT
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Reference: Display that appears when the settings are to be reset
E1-1
1Screen Configuration
E1-2
1.1 Screen Configuration
1.1 Screen Configuration
Top screen
The first screen to appear when the DISPLAY switch is pushed is referred to as the Top initial screen (see Fig. 1-1 on the left).
The 8 most frequently used items among the 14 setting items are displayed on this screen. To display the other 6 setting items, push the down key to scroll down the screen. (See Fig. 1-2 on the left).
1. To MENU screen
2. User selection
3. Iris gain settings
4. Zoom track function ON/OFF selection
5. Function allocation to AUX1 switch
6. Function allocation to VTR switch
7. Function allocation to AUX2 switch
8. Function allocation to RET switch
9. Frame Preset1 settings
10. Frame Preset2 settings
11. Iris torque setting
12. Zoom curve mode setting
13. Iris A/M switch setting
14. Function allocation to seesaw switch
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Fig1-1
Top initial screen
(For the setting procedures, see 2. Top screen.)
Fig1-2
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom
[ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
Items which are displayed by scrolling
Item which is not scrolled
The 33 setting items and 3 follow-up relative value displays appear on the display screen of this product. The most frequently used items are displayed in a simplified format on the Top screen (screen which appears when the DISPLAY switch is pushed). The setting of all the items and the detailed settings can be performed on the MENU screen (see next page).
A total of 14 setting items (see below) are provided on the Top screen.
E1-3
1.1 Screen Configuration
MENU screen
(For the setting procedures, see 3. MENU screen.)
1. User screen ....... (See Fig. 1-3 below) 2. Switch screen ........ (See Fig. 1-4 below) 3. Preset screen ........ (See Fig. 1-5 below) 4. Iris screen ....... (See Fig. 1-6 below) 5. Zoom screen ......... (See Fig. 1-7 below) 6. Focus screen *2 .......... (See Fig. 1-8 below) 7. Info screen ....... (See Fig. 1-9 below) 8. Fol. screen ....... (See Fig. 1-10 below)
The icon of the screen which has been
selected is highlighted.
The icons of the screens which have not
been selected are not highlighted.No. :
User
1
Name:
ResetAll
1
User screen
Fig1-3
No. :
User
1
Name:
ResetAll
1
Switch
Fig1-4
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Preset screen
Fig1-5
Frame1:
Preset
PRE
Frame2: PRE
ZSpeed: 800
Iris
Fig1-6
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Zoom screen
Fig1-7
Tracking:
F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Focus screen
Fig1-8
CurveMode
Focus [ ]
Fol. screen
Fig1-10
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Info screen
Fig1-9
Info
Initialize CamSeri: ON
Encoder: OFF
MENU Screen
The 33 setting items and 3 follow-up relative value displays are organized by function on the following 8 screens (or 7 screens in the case of the R type lens). These screens are collectively known as the MENU screen*1.
*1:There is no screen which is actually called the MENU screen, but the 8 screens listed above are collectively referred to as the MENU screen.
*2: This item does not appear with the R type lens.
To display these screens, select [MENU] on the Top screen, and push the Set key. The User screen is the first to appear. If the left or right key is now pushed, the screen is replaced by another screen.
[ ]
1
SC RE
EN CO
NF IG
ER AT
IO N
E2-1
2 Top Screen
E2-2
2.1 Top Screen
2.1 Top Screen
The screen which appears when the DISPLAY switch is pushed is referred to as the Top screen. A total of 14 items can be set on the Top screen. The rst screen to appear is referred to as the Top initial screen, and 8 items are displayed on it. When the down key is pushed, the display is scrolled down each time so that the other 6 items appear one after the other. (See gure below) Depending on the item concerned, its setting status can be checked. (See *1 in the gure below)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ]
[ Frm2 ][ Frm1 ]
ZoomNormAM
Top initial screen
Items which are displayed by scrolling
9 10
11 12
13 14
A 1
Inside the bold-line boxes: The current setting statuses are displayed for the items in these boxes. Example: Shtl indicates that the shuttle function
has been set in the AUX1 switch.
*1
1
3
5
7
4
6
8
2
5 Numbers in white on a black ground: These correspond to the numbers of the switches on the drive unit to which functions have been allocated. Refer to the lens illustration below.
ft
m
1x
2x
A 1
A 2
V
R
AM
14
13
8
5
6
7
E2-3
2.1 Top Screen
User
Zoom track
VTR switch
Frame Preset2
Iris gain
Seesaw switch
AUX1 switch
AUX2 switch
Iris A/M switch
Iris torque
Frame Preset1
Users User selection (User 0 to 9) Analog mode settings (User A) Analog mode operations (User A)
The settings can be changed for each of 10 users, who are indicated by the numbers 0 to 9, so that the appropriate settings will be used by the appropriate user. The user who will use them or the user for whom the settings are changed is selected here.When A is selected, the analog mode of a conventional type of drive unit can be established.When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used.
This is set to ON when the zoom track function is to be used.
At the factory, the {shuttle} function is allocated to the AUX1 switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.
At the factory, the {VTR} function is allocated to the VTR switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.
At the factory, the {Frame1} function is allocated to the AUX2 switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.
Zoom track function ON/OFF selection E2-14
Function allocation to VTR switch E2-16
Function allocation to AUX1 switch E2-15
Function allocation to AUX2 switch E2-17
"3. MENU Screen" E3-1
Page Page
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12[Trk]
A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]
MENU screenMENU
[ I-Tq ] [ I-Gain ]
[ Frm2 ]
[ Frm1 ]
AM
RET switch
Frame Preset2 settings E2-22
Iris gain setting E2-12
Function allocation to seesaw switch E2-29
Iris A/M switch setting E2-28
Iris torque setting E2-25
Frame Preset1 settings E2-19
Function allocation to RET switch E2-18
At the factory, the {Return} function is allocated to the RET switch on the drive unit, but another function can be allocated instead.
The preset speed of framing preset 1 and the zoom or focus operations up to the memory position can be switched to ON or OFF.
The preset speed of framing preset 2 and the zoom or focus operations up to the memory position can be switched to ON or OFF.
The amount of operating force used to operate the iris ring manually can be changed.
The iris gain in the auto or remote mode can be changed.
The movement of the iris A/M switch on the drive unit can be changed.
The iris operation using the zoom seesaw switch can be enabled.
E2-4 E2-5 E2-6 E2-9
Zoom curve mode The characteristics of the zoom speed, which is established in response to the amount by which the zoom seesaw switch is pushed in or the amount by which the thumb ring on the analog demand is tilted, can be changed.
Zoom curve mode setting E2-26
[ Z.M. ]
13
14
5
7
6
8
TO P
S C
R E
E N
E2-4
2.2 Users
2.2 Users
[ ]
User 1 to 9 Detailed settings can be performed for each user who will be performing operations. The settings estab- lished can be saved. The number of users for whom these settings can be performed is 9. (User 1 to 9)
User 0 This is the default user for whom the settings can be changed and used on a temporary basis. The settings cannot be saved.The settings are released when switching to User 1 to 9 or User A (analog mode) or when the power is turned off. When the escape operation is performed, User 0 is set. For details on the escape operation, refer to page E3-26. When User 0 is selected, the factory settings (except for the auto iris gain value, remote iris gain value, F-Hold setting, encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage) are established.
User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.
The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.
The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.
For details on the analog mode, refer to page E2-6 to E2-11.
E2-5
2.2 Users -User selection (User 0 to 9)
User selection (User 0 to 9) [ ]
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
Set
1 Move the key.
2 Push the key.
Set4 Push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
The last setting or default value is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 2
Top initial screen
or SetMENU [ ] 1 Set
Analog mode
Selection item
Setting storage
(D): Default value
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.
Settings can be stored on a user by user basis.
TO P
S C
R E
E N
On the Top screen, the user (User 0 to 9) who will be performing the operations can be switched and the analog mode (User A) can be selected. The detailed User 0 to 9 settings are performed from the MENU screen.(Refer to "3. MENU Screen") For details on selecting the analog mode (User A), refer to the following pages.
E2-6
2.2 Users Analog mode settings (User A)
Analog mode settings (User A)[ ]
User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.
The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.
The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.
The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.
Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these operations can be performed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.
Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distributors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.
(NOTE):
Unlocked Locked
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
E2-7
2.2 Users -User selection (User 0 to 9)
1 Move the key, and push the key.
The last setting or default value is blinking.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
Set
3 Push the key.
4 Push the key.
5 The analog mode is established.
2 Move the key or key, and select A.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
The display starts blinking.
[Unlock] is highlighted.
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
Top initial screen
orMENU [ ] 1 Set
Analog mode
Selection item
Setting storage
(D): Default value
[ ] A Set Set
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.
Settings can be stored on a user by user basis.
(1) Setting the analog mode when not locking the settings
[ ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
E2-8
2.2 Users -User selection (User 0 to 9)
Password
(D) Unlock Lock
MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set
Set Set
: Space
Max.8
Selection item Number of characters
(D) : Default value
(D) : Default value
Selection item
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
or
1 Move the key, and push the key.
The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display starts blinking.
[Unlock] is highlighted.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
Set
3 Push the key.
2 Move the key or key, and select A.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ ] A I G : 5 0
EnterPassword
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
4 Move the key, and push the key.
Set
Set
5 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.
6 Move the key, and push the key.
7 The lock is now set.
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
Top initial screen
(2) Setting the analog mode when locking the settings
[ ]
E2-9
2.2 Users -Analog mode operations (User A)
Analog mode operations (User A) [ ]
Unlocked Locked
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these operations can be per- formed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.
(1) Adjusting the auto iris gain
1 While the IG: area is highlighted, push the key.
The last setting or default is blinking.
Set
[ ] A
3 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
Note: If the lock mode is established, {Lock} appeears on the display instead of {A}.
I G : 50
I G : 55
[ ] A
I G : 5 0
I G : 5 5
Analog screen
SetSet
01Selection item
Function
99
Minimum gain Maximum gain
I G : 5 0
Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.
User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set. The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering
inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch. The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.
The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.
TO P
S C
R E
E N
E2-10
2.2 Users -Analog mode operations (User A)
(2) Changing the user The procedure for changing from the analog mode to another user depends on the lock mode setting status.
1 Move the key, and push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Set
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
I :
(Unlocked)
SetSet or I G : 5 0
[ ]
E2-11
2.2 Users -Analog mode operations (User A)
1 Move the key, and push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Set
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
2 Move the key or key.
I :
EnterPassword
Set3 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.
Set4 Move the key, and push the key.
Set
Set
5 Push the key.
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0 The display starts blinking.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
6 Move the key or key, and push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
(Locked)
PasswordorSet Set Set Set
Set
(D) Default value
Max.8
Selection item
Can be input as the password.
Number of characters
I G : 5 0
or
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
[ ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
E2-12
2.3 Iris gain setting - Auto iris gain setting
The auto iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired. There are two ways to change its setting: one involves using the auto iris gain adjusting trimmer (refer to the Lens Manual), and the other is through display operations. The setting established last takes prece- dence.
The same auto iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the dis- play. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.
(1) Auto iris gain setting
Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris op- eration
-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.
-> Set the camera s iris mode to [AUTO].
Note: Find the iris ring on the lens body, and set it to the position where the maximum gain is achieved without causing hunting.
Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Re- setting" procedure described on page 3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recommended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be re- quired.
The item is now highlighted.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Push the key.Set
5 Push the key.Set
4 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.
An underline appears below [Auto]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.
Top initial screen
[I-Gain] screen
3 Move the key.
1 Move the key.
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 73
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 73
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 71
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Screen A
Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.
Setor
01Selection item
Function
99
Minimum gain Maximum gain
MENU Set[ I-Gain ]
2.3 Iris gain setting[ I-Gain ]
E2-13
2.3 Iris gain setting -Remote iris gain setting
(2) Remote iris gain setting
Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris operation
-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.
-> Set the camera's iris mode to [Remote].
The remote iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired.
The same remote iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an excep- tion to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.
The item is now highlighted.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Push the key.Set
5 Push the key.Set
4 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.
An underline appears below [Remote]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.
Top initial screen
I-Gain
3 Move the key twice.
1 Move the key.
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 80 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Default value: 90
Setor
01Selection item
Function
99
Minimum gain Maximum gain
MENU Set 2[ I-Gain ]
Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Reset- ting" procedure described on page 3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recommended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be required.
[ I-Gain ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
E2-14
2.4 Zoom track function ON/OFF selection
This item is used to set the zoom track function to ON or OFF.
1 Move the key, and push the key.
2 Push the key.
4 Push the key.
The display starts blinking.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
[Trk]OFF
[Trk]ON
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]ON Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
The last setting or default setting is highlighted.
Top initial screen
(D)
(D) Default value
Setor
OFFSelection item ON
MENU Set[Trk]OFF
2.4 Zoom track function ON/OFF selection
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
[Trk]
E2-15
2.5 Function allocation to AUX1 switch
This item is used to allocate a function to the AUX1 switch.
Set
1 Move the key twice.
2 Push the key.
Set4 Push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The function set last or default function is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ShtlA 1
VTRA 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF VTR VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top initial screen
or Set
(D) Default value
2
Shtl(D) Selection item
Function
NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch VTR switch Framing Preset1
switch Framing Preset2
switch Speed Preset
switch
MENU SetShtlA 1
2.5 Function allocation to AUX1 switch A 1
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-16
2.6 Function allocation to VTR switch
This item is used to allocate a function to the VTR switch.
Set
1 Move the key twice and the key once.
2 Push the key.
Set4 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl RETA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
VTRV
RETV
The display starts blinking.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The function set last or default function is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
Top initial screen
or2 Set
(D) Default value
(D) ShtlSelection item VTR
Function
RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot buttonVTR switch RET switch Framing Preset1
switch Framing Preset2
switch Speed Preset
switch
MENU SetVTRV
2.6 Function allocation to VTR switchV
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-17
2.7 Function allocation to AUX2 switch
This item is used to allocate a function to the AUX2 switch.
Set
1 Move the key three times.
2 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
ShtlA 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
FRM1A 2
ShtlA 2
Set4 Push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The function set last or default function is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
Top initial screen
or3 SetMENU SetA 1 FRM1A 2
(D) Default value
Shtl(D) Selection item
Function
NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch RET switchFraming Preset1
switch Framing Preset2
switch Speed Preset
switch
2.7 Function allocation to AUX2 switch A 2
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-18
2.8 Function allocation to RET switch
This item is used to allocate a function to the RET switch.
Set
1 Move the key three times and move the key once.
2 Push the key.
Set4 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
RETR
FRM2R
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
FRM2R
[ ]MENU
The display starts blinking.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
3 Move the key or key.
Top initial screen
or3 Set
(D) Default value
(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot button VTR switchRET switch
Selection item
Function Framing Preset1 switch
Framing Preset2 switch
Speed Preset switch
MENU SetA 1 RETR
2.8 Function allocation to RET switchR
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-19
2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 preset speed setting
(1) Frame Preset1 preset speed setting
This makes it possible to select whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)
Note: If {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page 3-42)
1 Move the key four times.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key or key.
4 Push the key.
The display is switched to the Preset screen, and an underline appears below [Frame1]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
Top initial screen
Screen A
Preset screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
PRESelection item
Function
FAST
Operation at the preset speed
Operation at the maximum speed
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
2.9 Frame Preset1 settings [ Frm1 ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-20
2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 zoom ON/OFF selection
(2) Frame Preset1 zoom ON/OFF selection
This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the zoom operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this zoom operation is set.)
1 Move the key four times.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key.
4 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
An underline appears below [Zoom]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
5 Push the key.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
Screen A
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON This item does not appear
with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
ONSelection item
Function
OFF
Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
[ Frm1 ]
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-21
2.9 Frame Preset1 settings - Frame Preset1 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)
(3) Frame Preset1 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)
This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the focus operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this focus operation is set.)
Note: This item can be selected with the "A" type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the "R" type lens.
1 Move the key four times.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key twice.
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
An underline appears below [Focus]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
5 Push the key.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
Top initial screen
Screen A
Preset screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
4 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
ONSelection item
Function
OFF
Focus operations enabledFocus operations disabled
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ] 2
[ Frm1 ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-22
2.10 Frame Preset2 settings - Frame Preset2 preset speed setting
(1) Frame Preset2 preset speed setting
This makes it possible to select whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)
Note: If {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)
1 Move the key four times and the key once.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key or key.
4 Push the key.
The display is switched to the Preset screen, and an underline appears below [Frame2]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The item is now highlighted.
Top initial screen
Screen A
Preset screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
The display returns to Screen A.
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
PRESelection item
Function
FAST
Operation at the preset speed
Operation at the maximum speed
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]
2.10 Frame Preset2 settings[ Frm2 ]
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-23
2.10 Frame Preset2 settings - Frame Preset2 zoom ON/OFF selection
(2) Frame Preset2 zoom ON/OFF selection
This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the zoom operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this zoom operation is set.)
1 Move the key four times and the key once.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key.
4 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
An underline appears below [Zoom]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
5 Push the key.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
Screen A
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
ONSelection item
Function
OFF
Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]
[ Frm2 ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-24
2.10 Frame Preset2 settings - Frame Preset2 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)
(3) Frame Preset2 focus ON/OFF selection ("A" type lens only)
This makes it possible to select enable or disable for the focus operations up to the memory position. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when the focus operation is set.)
Note: This item can be selected with the "A" type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the "R" type lens.
1 Move the key four times and the key once.
2 Push the key.
3 Move the key twice.
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
An underline appears below [Focus]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
5 Push the key.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
Top initial screen
Screen A
Preset screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
4 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
ONSelection item
Function
OFF
Focus operations enabledFocus operations disabled
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ] 2
[ Frm2 ]
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-25
2.11 Iris torque setting
This makes it possible to select the amount of force used to manually operate the iris ring.
The display starts blinking.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Push the key.Set
4 Push the key.Set
1 Move the key five times.
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] L
[ I-Tq ] H
[ I-Tq ] L
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The last setting or default value is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {H} or {L}.
Top initial screen
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
HSelection item
Function
L
High operating force Low operating force
MENU Set5 [ I-Tq ] H
2.11 Iris torque setting [ I-Tq ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-26
2.12 Zoom curve mode setting - Seesaw switch curve characteristics setting
(1) Seesaw switch curve characteristics setting
This item makes it possible to change the zoom speed characteristics which is established in response to the amount by which the zoom seesaw switch is pushed in. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)
2 Push the key.
4 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.
An underline appears below [Seesaw]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
3 Move the key.
5 Push the key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
[ Z.M. ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Set
Set
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw: 5
5
[ ]
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
D5 5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
3 5
Screen A
Top initial screen
CurveMode screen
1 Move the key five times and the key once.
D Default value
[ Z.M. ]MENU Set Setor5
1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
(1)
(9)
Zo om
s pe
ed
MAX
Amount by which zoom seesaw switch is pushed in Zoom direction
Wide angle Telephoto
Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment
2.12 Zoom curve mode setting[ Z.M. ]
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-27
2.12 Zoom curve mode setting - Analog demand curve characteristics setting
(2) Analog demand curve characteristics setting
This item makes it possible to change the zoom speed characteristics which is established in response to the amount by which the analog demand is tilted. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)
2 Push the key.
4 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
The item is now highlighted.
3 Move the key twice.
5 Push the key.
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ] Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [Demand]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
[ Z.M. ]
1 Move the key five times and the key once.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Set
Set
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw: 5
5
[ ]
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
D5
8 5
5
Screen A
CurveMode screen
Top initial screen
or[ Z.M. ] 2 SetMENU Set
D Default value
1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
5
(1)
(9)
Zo om
s pe
ed
MAX
Amount by which analog demand is tilted Zoom direction
Wide angle Telephoto
Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment
[ Z.M. ]
TO P
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-28
2.13 Iris A/M switch setting
A function can be allocated to the iris A/M switch which is located on the top of the drive unit.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
ReveAM
Set
1 Move the key six times.
2 Push the key.
Set4 Push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The last setting function or default function is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
Top initial screen
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
NormAM
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
ReveAM
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
NormSelection item
Function
Reve
Normal operation A Auto / M Manual
Reverse operation A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual
Auto Manu
Auto Only Manual Only
MENU Set6 NormAM
2.13 Iris A/M switch settingAM
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E2-29
2.14 Function allocation to seesaw switch
The {Zoom} or {Iris} operation function can be allocated to the zoom seesaw switch.
Precautions when the iris function has been allocated Note 1: Zoom operations cannot be performed using the seesaw switch. Note 2: Before the iris is to be operated using the rocker switch, the iris mode must be set to MANUAL. Note 3: When the TELE side is pushed down, the iris operation is set to the OPEN side; conversely, when the
WIDE side is pushed down, it is set to the CLOSE side. Note 4: The zoom speed adjustment function takes effect, and the maximum iris speed can be changed. (See
page E3-59)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Iris
Set
1 Move the key six times and the key once.
2 Push the key.
Set4 Push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Move the left or right key to select {Zoom} or {Iris}.
The display stops blinking and reverts to being highlighted, and the setting is entered.
The last setting function or default function is highlighted.
3 Move the key or key.
Top initial screen
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ]
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Iris [ Z.M. ]
(D) Default value
(D)
Setor
ZoomSelection item
Function
Iris
Zoom operations Iris operations
MENU Set6 Zoom
2.14 Function allocation to seesaw switch
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
TO P
S C
R E
E N
E3-1
3 MENU Screen
E3-2
3.1 MENU screen
3.1 MENU Screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1 [ ] A I G : 5 0
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 ShtlNo. :
User 1
Name: ResetAll
1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
: Go Top : BackSet
Set
1 2
3
4
56
7
8
1
2
3
5
6
7
4 8
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ] CurveMode
Focus [ ]
Info Encoder: Initialize CamSeri: ON
OFF
(A)
(A )
(0 to 9)
(0 to
9 )
Analog mode screen: The analog mode screen appears when User A has been selected. User is displayed for (A) or (0 to 9).
Set
Set
Switch screen E3-27
Zoom screen E3-51
Fol. screen E3-75
Preset screen E3-35
Focus screen E3-65
User screen E3-3
Info screen E3-67
Iris screen E3-45
Top initial screen Analog mode screen
MENU screen
Zoom screenFocus screen
Fol. screen
Info screen
key
key
key To Go Top screen
To User screen
To Top screen
key
key
To the screen in the counterclockwise direction
To the screen in the clockwise direction
User screen Switch screen
Preset screen
Iris screen
Go Top screen
Page Page
All the 33 setting items and the 3 follow-up relative values displays on this information display can be set or indicated on the MENU screen*. The MENU screen is organized as 8 different function screens (or 7 different function screens for the R type lens): the User screen, Switch screen, Preset screen, Iris screen, Zoom screen, Focus screen, (only for the A type lens), Info screen, and Fol. screen. When [MENU] on the Top screen is selected and the Set key is pushed, the User screen is the first to appear. The display can be switched to the other 7 screens by pushing the left key or right key. (See figure below)
*: There is no screen which is actually called the MENU screen, but the 8 screens mentioned above are collectively referred to as the MENU screen.
A setting item with the display at the side of a function title can also be set on the Top screen.Top
E3-3
3.2 User Screen
3.2 User Screen
There are three categories of users, each of which is described below.
User 1 to 9 Detailed settings can be performed for each user who will be performing operations. The settings estab- lished can be saved. The number of users for whom these settings can be performed is 9. (User 1 to 9)
User 0 This is the default user for whom the settings can be changed and used on a temporary basis. The settings cannot be saved.The settings are released when switching to User 1 to 9 or User A (analog mode) or when the power is turned off. When the escape operation is performed, User 0 is set. For details on the escape operation, refer to page E3-26. When User 0 is selected, the factory settings (except for the auto iris gain value, remote iris gain value, F-Hold setting, encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage) are estab- lished.
User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specifications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.
The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.
The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.
For details on the analog mode, refer to page E3-19 to E3-25. Page
User selection (User 0 to 9) ............................................................................................................. E3-4
Giving names to the users ................................................................................................................... E3-5
Resetting
(1) Resetting the settings for one user ............................................................................................. E3-6
(2) Resetting the settings for all the users ....................................................................................... E3-7
Copying the settings established for one user to another user ........................................................... E3-8
Copying data betweenLenses
(1) Copying the data settings established for one user into another lens ...................................... E3-10
(2) Copying the data settings established for all the users into another lens ................................ E3-12
(3) When an error display has appeared ....................................................................................... E3-14
Lock mode setting (User 0 to 9) ........................................................................................................ E3-15
Analog mode settings (User A) .......................................................................................................... E3-19
Analog mode operations (User A) ..................................................................................................... E3-23
Escape operation .............................................................................................................................. E3-26
Top
Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Top
Top
E3-4
3.2 User Screen - User selection (User 0 to 9)
User selection (User 0 to 9)
The display is switched to the User screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
2 Move the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3 Move the key or key.
An underline appears below [No.]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
1 Push the key. Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
2 2
or SetMENU Set User 1
Settings can be stored on a user by user basis. Analog mode
Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.
Selection item
Setting storage
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
(D) Default value
The user (User 0 to 9) who will be performing the operations can be switched and the analog mode (User A) can be selected. For details on the analog mode (User A), refer to pages E3-19 to E3-25. The User No. is switched to perform settings by individual user.
Top
E3-5
3.2 User Screen - Giving names to the users
2 Move the key twice.
3 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Push the key.Set
Set
Name User
Name:
1 {} of the first character is highlighted, indicating the status in which a change can be made.
Set5 Push the key to enter the change.
The display is switched to the Title Name.
Name User
Name: A
1
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
A
The display is switched to the User screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
Title Name
4 Move the key or key.
An underline appears below [Name].
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
or SetMENU
(D) Default value Space
Set User 1 Set2
Max.8
Selection item
Number of characters
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
A name can be given to each of the users.
Giving names to the users
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-6
3.2 User Screen - Resetting the settings for one user
The display is switched to the User screen.
2 Move the key three times.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
User 1 Reset Now.
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
1 Push the key.Set
The operator is asked whether the pre-selected user is to be reset.
The display is switched to the Reset screen.
Set6 Push the key to enter the decision.
The screen temporarily shows "Now resetting," and the display returns to Title Reset. This completes the resetting.
5 Move the key to select {y}.
Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
A
A
Top initial screen
User screen
Title Reset
Title Reset
Reset screen
An underline appears below [ResetAll].
or SetMENU Set User 1 Set3
(1) Resetting the settings for one user The settings established for one user can be reset so that they can return to the default values.
The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 5 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without resetting the settings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without resetting the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.
Note: The iris gain, F-Hold setting, Encoder output setting, Initialize opera- tion setting and Camera Fol Voltage are the only values which are not reset. The value established prior to initialization remains unchanged.
Resetting
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-7
3.2 User Screen - Resetting the settings for all the users
The display is switched to the User screen.
2 Move the key three times.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key twice.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
All User Reset Now.
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
1 Push the key.Set
Set
The operator is asked whether the settings of all the users are to be reset or not.
The display is switched to the Reset screen.
Set6 Push the key to enter the decision.
The screen temporarily shows "Now resetting," and the display returns to Title Reset. This completes the resetting.
5 Move the key to select {y}.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
A
A
Top initial screen
User screen
Title Reset
Title Reset
Reset screen
An underline appears below [ResetAll].
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
or SetMENU Set User 1 Set3 2
(2) Resetting the settings for all the users
The settings established for all the user can be reset so that they can return to the default values.
Note: There is no need to select a user.
The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 5 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without resetting the settings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without resetting the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.
Note: The iris gain, F-Hold setting, Encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Cam- era Fol Voltage are the only values which are not reset. The value established prior to initialization remains unchanged.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-8
3.2 User Screen - Copying the settings established for one user to another user
3 Push the key.
6 Move the key.
Continued on next page
5 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
3 y/n
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
1 y/n
1 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key twice.
4 Move the key.
Set
An underline appears below [Copy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.
An underline appears below [To No.].
Move the left or right key until the user serving as the copy destination appears.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1 The display is switched to the User screen.
The display is switched to the Copy screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
Screen A
Copy screen
An underline appears below [Copy].
The settings established for one user can be copied to another user.
The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 7 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be un- done without copying the settings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without copying the set- tings, push the DISPLAY switch.
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
Copying the settings established for one user to another user
E3-9
3.2 User Screen - 1 1
or
Set
MENU Set User 1 Set4
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Select {y}.
Set8 Push the key. The settings are copied into the specified user number, and the display returns to Screen A.
7 Move the key.
Continued from Previous page
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
3 y/n
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-10
3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses
With the drive unit installed the information display, the setting establisbed on the information display can be copied into another information display drive unit.There are two copy types.1:Copying the data settings established for one user (See this page). 2:Copying the data settings established for all the users (See the page E3-12).A dedicated cable purchased separately is required for this operation. For further details,consult a Canon sales representative or your Canon dealer.
(1) Copying the data settings established for one user into another lens
3 Push the key.
Continued on next page
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
1 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key five times.
4 Move the key.
Set
Set
An underline appears below [Connect], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.
5 Move the key, and select {y}.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1 The display is switched to the User screen.
The display is switched to the ToOtherLens screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
Screen A
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Screen B
ToOtherLens screen
An underline appears below [ToOtherLens].
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
6 Push the key. The display is switched to the Screen B.
7 Move the key.
The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 12 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without copying the set- tings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without copying the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.
Preparations prior to operation (Be absolutely sure to undertake these preparations.) 1.Plug one end of the dedicated cable (20P-20P) into the zoom remote & focus remote connector (20-pin) of
the copy source lens and the other end into the corresponding connector of the copy destination lens. 2.Turn on the power of the copy source lens and copy destination lens. 3. Push the DISPLAY switch on the copy source lens to turn on the display. (Do not turn on the display of the
copy destination lens.)
Copying data between lenses
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-11
3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses
Set
SetMENU
Set
Set User 1 Set5
or
Continued from Previous page
8 Push the key.
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
1 y/n
User screen
Copy selection screen The display is switched to the Copy Selection screen.
The display is switched to the User screen.
10 Move the or key.
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 1
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
Move the left or right key until the number of the user, to whom the settings are to be copied, at the copy destination lens appears.
11 Move the key.
9 Move the key. An underline appears below [To No.].
An underline appears below [Copy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.
Set13 Push the key.
12 Move the key, and select {y}.
Now Data Copy Please Wait...
The screen now shows the "Now Data Copy" message for a few moments before returning to Screen A. This completes the copying of the settings between the lenses.
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Screen A
Set
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
2
1
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
*1: If the Set key is pushed here, copying is actually com- menced. Bear in mind that once copying starts, it will not be possible to restore the data in the copy destination lens to the original data.
*2: Refrain from operating the op- eration switch or pushing the DISPLAY switch on either the copy source lens or copy des- tination lens while the settings are being copied. Otherwise, the copying operation may not be conducted properly.
Note: If the settings were not copied successfully, an error message will appear. For details on what remedial action to take, refer to "(3) When an error display has appeared" on page E3-14.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-12
3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses
(2) Copying the data settings established for all the users into another lens
A dedicated cable purchased separately is required for this operation. For further details, consult a Canon sales representative or your dealer.
3 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
Continued on next page
1 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key five times.
Set
4 Move the key.
Set
An underline appears below [Connect], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1 The display is switched to the User screen.
The display is switched to the ToOtherLens screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
Screen A
An underline appears below [ToOtherLens].
ToOtherLens screen
5 Move the key, and select {y}.
6 Push the key.
The operating steps taken be- tween steps 1 to 10 (within the two dotted parallel lines) can be undone without copying the set- tings. To return to the original screen, move the up key. To turn off the display without copying the settings, push the DISPLAY switch.
Preparations prior to operation 1. Plug one end of the dedicated cable (20P-20P) into the zoom remote & focus remote connector (20-pin)
of the copy source lens and the other end into the corresponding connector of the copy destination lens. 2. Turn on the power of the copy source lens and copy destination lens. 3. Push the DISPLAY switch on the copy source lens to turn on the display. (Do not turn on the display of
the copy destination lens.)
E3-13
3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses
Set
An underline appears below [AllCopy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.
Screen B
y/n
Continued from Previous page
9 Move the key.
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
AllCopy screen
The display is switched to the AllCopy screen.
An underline appears below [Copy], and either {y} (YES) or {n} (NO) can now been selected.
Set11 Push the key.
10 Move the key, and select {y}.
Now Data Copy Please Wait...
The screen now shows the "Now Data Copy" message for a few moments before returning to Screen A. This completes the copying of the settings between the lenses.
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Screen A
The display is switched to the Screen B.
7 Move the key twice.
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
2
1
8 Push the key.
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n
Set
SetMENU Set User 1 Set
Set
5
2
*1: If the Set key is pushed here, copying is actually com- menced. Bear in mind that once copying starts, it will not be possible to restore the data in the copy destination lens to the original data.
*2: Refrain from operating the op- eration switch or pushing the DISPLAY switch on either the copy source lens or copy des- tination lens while the settings are being copied. Otherwise, the copying operation may not be conducted properly.Note: If the settings were not copied successfully, an error message will appear.
For details on what remedial action to take, refer to (3) When an error dis- play has appeared on page E3-14.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-14
3.2 User Screen - Copying data between lenses
(3) When an error display has appeared
If the settings were not copied successfully between the lenses, refer to the information in the table below.
Lens Connect Error!!
Has the dedicated cable (20P-20P) been connected?
Data cannot be copied between the lenses unless the dedicated cable (20P-20P) has been connected.
If, during copying, the cable was disconnected or the power of the copy destination lens dropped or it was turned off, the screen with the message shown on the left will be displayed. In a case like this, data copying has been stopped before it was completed and, as a result, the data is not copied properly.
Data cannot be copied between the lenses unless the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens has been turned on.
Has the power of the copy destination lens been turned on?
Have the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens been turned on?
Has the dedicated cable (20P-20P) been connected?
Turn on the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens, and go through the copying procedure again from the start.
Check that the power of both the copy source lens and copy destination lens have been turned on and the dedicated cable has been connected securely. Then push the DISPLAY sw and the display is switched to the Screen A, and go through the copying procedure again from the start.
Securely connect the dedicated cable (20P-20P) to the copy source lens and copy destination lens, and go through the copying procedure again from the start.
CheckpointError screen Cause of error Remedial action
Copy Error!!
User Copy ToOtherLens
1
Screen A
Access: Unlock
E3-15
3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)
The lock mode can be set for specific functions to ensure that the functions which have been locked will not be easily changed. It cannot be set differently for individual users, and once it has been set, it applies to all users. For details on the lock mode while the analog mode is established, refer to page E3-19 to E3-22.
(1) Lock operation
Continued on next page
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Move the key six times.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top initial screen
User screen
The last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display is switched to the User screen.
User Copy ToOtherLens
1
Access: Unlock Set3 Push the key.
Set1 Push the key.
Unlocked Locked
[ ] Lock [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1 [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU
Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)
Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.
(NOTE)
While the lock mode is established, the following items can be set and the other items can no longer be set. Preset data(Shtl Shot position,Frame Preset position,preset speed) Zoom Track position and its ON/OFF setting Auto Iris Gain setting F-Hold setting Encoder output setting Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage
(NOTE)
When a numeral from 0 to 9 is found in the User No. display area, it means that the function is unlocked. When the letters that spell "Lock" are found in the User No. display area, it means that the function is locked.
(NOTE)
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-16
3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)
Password Set
(D) Default value Space
Set Set Set6 DISPLAY
Max.8
Selection item
Can be input as the password.
Number of characters
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item Unlock Lock
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Continued from Previous page
Set
Set
4 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
5 Move the key, and push the key.
6 The lock is now set.
User Copy
1
ToOtherLens Access: Lock
Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.
(NOTE)
E3-17
3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)
(2) Unlock operation There are two ways to perform this operation.
(Unlock operation 1)
or Password Set Set[ ] Lock
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item Unlock Lock
2 Push the key.
[ ] 1
Top initial screen
The display starts blinking.
1 Move the key.
MENU
MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ] Lock
MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
Set
Set
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
5 Move the key,and push the key.
6 The letters that spell "Lock" change to the User No.
3 Move the key, or key
Set4 Input the password, and press the key.
The same password which was input to lock the function serves as the password to unlock it.
(The User No. that was locked is displayed.)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ] Lock
[ ] Lock
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-18
3.2 User Screen - Lock mode settings (User 0 to 9)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU [ ] Lock
2 Move the key six times.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top initial screen
User screen The display is switched to the User screen.
1 Push the key.Set
1
1
User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Lock
Set3 Push the key.
Set
Set
4 Input the password, and press the key.
The same password which was input to lock the function serves as the password to unlock it.
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
5 Move the key,and push the key.
6 Unlock has now been set.
User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Unlock
(Unlock operation 2)
Password SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY
E3-19
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)
User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specifications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.
The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.
The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.
The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.
Unlocked Locked
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these opera- tions can be performed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.
Analog mode settings (User A) Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.
(NOTE)
E3-20
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)
(1) Setting the analog mode when not locking the settings
The display is switched to the User screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
2 Move the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3 Move the key or key, and select A.
An underline appears below [No.]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
{Unlock} is highlighted.
[ ] A I G : 5 0
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
1 Push the key.
4 Push the key.Set
5 Push the key.Set
6 The analog mode is established.
Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
A A
or SetMENU SetSet User 1
Settings can be stored on a user by user basis. Analog mode
Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.
Selection item
Setting storage
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
(D) Default value
E3-21
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)
(2) Setting the analog mode when locking the settings
The display is switched to the User screen.
Top initial screen
User screen
2 Move the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3 Move the key or key, and select A.
An underline appears below [No.]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
EnterPassword
Set6 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
Set5 Move the key, and push the key.
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n Continued on next page
1 Push the key.Set
4 Push the key.Set
{Unlock} is highlighted.
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
A A
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-22
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode settings (User A)
8 The lock is now set.
[ ] LockI G : 5 0
Set7 Move the key, and push the key.
Continued from Previous page
Password Set
(D) Default value Space
Set DISPLAY
Max.8
Selection item
Can be input as the password.
Number of characters
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item Unlock Lock
Settings can be stored on a user by user basis.
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
or SetMENU SetSet User 1
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Settings cannot be stored. The settings cannot be stored but they can be changed temporarily. The default values are restored by selecting the user or turning off the power of the lens.
Selection item
Setting storage
Analog mode
Concerning the password This model does not have a special password setting screen. The password which is established every time a lock operation is performed is the password which is needed to unlock the function. This means that you should make a note of each password. If you have forgotten the password, contact Canon or one of its distribu- tors. Anything from blanks to a maximum of 8 digits can be input as the password.
(NOTE)
E3-23
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode operations (User A)
Unlocked Locked
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Two types of operations can be performed on the display: the auto iris gain can be adjusted, and the analog mode can be changed to another user. If the lock mode is established, it must be released (Unlock) before these operations can be performed. The password used at the setting stage is required to release the lock mode.
(1) Adjusting the auto iris gain
1 While the IG: area is highlighted, push the key.
The last setting or default is blinking.
Set
[ ] A
3 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
Note: If the lock mode is established, {Lock} appeears on the display instead of {A}.
I G : 50
I G : 55
[ ] A
I G : 5 0
I G : 5 5
Analog screen
SetSet
01Selection item
Function
99
Minimum gain Maximum gain
I G : 5 0
Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.
User A (analog mode) This is selected when a conventional type of drive unit (with analog specifications) is to be operated. When the analog mode is established, the digital functions can no longer be used. The following applies to the drive units when this mode has been set.
The VTR, RET, IRIS A/M and IRIS INST switches perform the functions that correspond to the lettering inscribed on them. The rocker switch serves as a regular zooming switch.
The AUX1, AUX2 and MEMO switches cannot be used. The auto iris gain adjustment can be set by operating the display or the trimmer control. The shuttle shot, frame preset, speed preset and zoom track functions cannot be used.
The displays in the analog mode appear as shown below.
Analog mode operations (User A) Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-24
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode operations (User A)
(2) Changing the user The procedure for changing from the analog mode to another user depends on the lock mode setting status.
1 Move the key, and push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Set
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3 Push the key.Set
2 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appear.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
I :
(Unlocked)
SetSet or I G : 5 0
E3-25
3.2 User Screen - Analog mode operations (User A)
1 Move the key, and push the key.
The display starts blinking.
Set
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
2 Move the key or key.
I :
EnterPassword
Set3 Input the password, and push the key. Password character input Use the up and down keys to search the characters, and the left and right keys to move from one digit to another or make corrections. Do NOT press the SET key until the password input is complete.
Set4 Move the key, and push the key.
Set
Set
5 Push the key.
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0 The display starts blinking.
The display which was blinking is now highlighted to indicate that the change has been entered.
6 Move the key or key, and push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
(Locked)
PasswordorSet Set Set Set
Set
(D) Default value
Max.8
Selection item
Can be input as the password.
Number of characters
I G : 5 0
or
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
1 Hold down the DISPLAY switch and key for more than 2 seconds. The following message is displayed depending on the user who was using the system prior to the jump operation.
User 0 : User 0 Reset Now User 1 to 9 : Escape To User 0
Set
2 The Top initial screen is displayed.
User 0 Reset Now
With User 0
Escape To User 0
With User 1 to 9
Any screen
Top initial screen or
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
2 secSetandDISPLAY[ ]
When the power is turned on again: The same user who was using the system prior to the jump operation is selected. However, if the user was changed after the jump operation was performed, the user using the system after the change was made is selected instead.
This operation makes it possible to jump instantly to the User 0 setting status (factory setting status) from the current setting status whether for any user (User 0 to 9) or User A.
(1) For User 0 to 9
(2) For User A (Analog mode)
1 Hold down the DISPLAY switch and key for more than 2 seconds.Set
2 The Top initial screen is displayed.
Escape To User 0
Analog mode
Top initial screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3.2 User Screen - Escape operation
E3-26
Escape operation
Even when the jump operation is performed, the settings of the following items will remain the same as before the jump operation: auto iris gain value, remote iris gain value, F-Hold setting, encoder output setting, Initialize operation setting and Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage.
(NOTE)
The jump operation cannot be performed in the lock status.
(NOTE)
E3-27
Page
Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch .......................................................................................E3-28
Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch .......................................................................................E3-29
Allocating a function to the VTR switch .........................................................................................E3-30
Allocating a function to the RET switch .........................................................................................E3-31
Setting the iris A/M switch .............................................................................................................E3-32
Allocating a function to the seesaw switch ....................................................................................E3-33
Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
3.3 Switch Screen
3.3 Switch Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-28
3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch
or
(D) Default value
Shtl(D) Selection item
Function
NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch RET switch Framing Preset1
switch Framing Preset2
switch Speed Preset
switch
MENU Set Switch 1
The display is switched to the Switch screen.
2 Move the key.
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set
An underline appears below [AUX1]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
Switch screen
Top initial screen
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2 FRM1 Shtl
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2 FRM1 VTR
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
A function can be allocated to the AUX1 switch.
Allocating a function to the AUX1 switch Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-29
3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
The display is switched to the Switch screen.
2 Move the key twice.
3 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set
An underline appears below [AUX2]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
Switch screen
Top initial screen
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2
Shtl FRM1
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2
Shtl Sped
(D) Default value
Shtl(D) Selection item
Function
NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot button No function VTR switch RET switchFraming Preset1
switch Framing Preset2
switch Speed Preset
switch
2 orMENU Set Switch 1
A function can be allocated to the AUX2 switch.
Allocating a function to the AUX2 switch Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-30
3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the VTR switch
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
RET:R RET
AUX2:A 2
VTR:V
FRM1 VTR
Switch 1
RET:R RET
AUX2:A 2
VTR:V
FRM1 RET
The display is switched to the Switch screen.
2 Move the key three times.
3 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set
An underline appears below [VTR]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
Switch screen
Top initial screen
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
3 orMENU Set Switch 1
(D) Default value
(D) ShtlSelection item VTR
Function
RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot buttonVTR switch RET switch Framing Preset1
switch Framing Preset2
switch Speed Preset
switch
A function can be allocated to the VTR switch.
Allocating a function to the VTR switch Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-31
3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the RET switch
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
The display is switched to the Switch screen.
2 Move the key four times.
3 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set
An underline appears below [RET]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
Switch screen
Top initial screen
Switch 1
A/M:AM Normal
VTR:V
RET:R
VTR RET
Switch 1
A/M:AM Normal
VTR:V
RET:R
VTR Sped
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
4 orMENU Set Switch 1
(D) Default value
(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
Shuttle-Shot button VTR switchRET switch
Selection item
Function Framing Preset1 switch
Framing Preset2 switch
Speed Preset switch
A function can be allocated to the RET switch.
Allocating a function to the RET switch Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-32
3.3 Switch Screen - Setting the iris A/M switch
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET
Zoom Normal
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET
Zoom Revers
The display is switched to the Switch screen.
2 Move the key five times.
3 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set
An underline appears below [A/M]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
Switch screen
Top initial screen
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
5 orMENU Set Switch 1
(D) Default value
(D)NormalSelection item
Function
Revers
Normal operation A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual
Reverse operation
Auto Manual
Auto Only Manual Only
A function can be allocated to the iris A/M switch.
Setting the iris A/M switch Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-33
3.3 Switch Screen - Allocating a function to the seesaw switch
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET Normal
Zoom
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET Normal
Iris
The display is switched to the Switch screen.
2 Move the key six times.
3 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and then move the key.Set
An underline appears below [SSaw]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
Switch screen
Top initial screen
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
6MENU Set Switch 1
(D)
(D)Zoom Iris
Zoom Iris
The {Zoom} or {Iris} operation function can be allocated to the zoom seesaw switch.
Precautions when the iris function has been allocated Note 1: Zoom operations cannot be performed using the seesaw switch. Note 2: Before the iris is to be operated using the rocker switch, the iris mode must be set to MANUAL. The
iris cannot be operated in the AUTO or REMOTE mode. Note 3: When the TELE side is pushed down, the iris operation is set to the OPEN side; conversely, when the
WIDE side is pushed down, it is set to the CLOSE side. Note 4: The zoom speed adjustment function takes effect, and the maximum iris speed can be changed. (See
page E3-59)
Allocating a function to the seesaw switch Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-35
Page
Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed ......................................................................................E3-36
Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF ............................................................................E3-37
Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) .............................................E3-38
Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed ......................................................................................E3-39
Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF ............................................................................E3-40
Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) .............................................E3-41
Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode .........................................................................................E3-42
Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations ................................................................E3-43
Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations .................................................................E3-44
Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
3.4 Preset Screen
3.4 Preset Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-36
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
2 Move the key.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
Screen A
Frame1 screen
An underline appears below [Frame1].
Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
Set
The display is switched to the Frame1 screen. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
The display returns to Screen A.
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
(D) Default value
(D)PRESelection item
Function
FAST
Operation at the preset speed
Operation at the maximum speed
Set Set2 Preset orMENU Set
Whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position can be selected. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)
Note: When {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)
Setting the Frame Preset1 preset speed Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-37
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF
2 Move the key.
3 Push the key, and move the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Push the key.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
Screen A
Frame1 screen
An underline appears below [Frame1].
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Set
The display is switched to the Frame1 screen. An underline appears below [Zoom], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item
Function
Set Set2 Preset orMENU Set
ON OFF
Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled
The zoom operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when the setting is performed.)
Setting the Frame Preset1 zoom to ON or OFF Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-38
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
2 Move the key.
3 Push the key, and move the key twice.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Push the key.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
Screen A
Frame1 screen
An underline appears below [Frame1].
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Set
The display is switched to the Frame1 screen. An underline appears below [Focus], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item
Function
Set Set2 2Preset orMENU Set
OFF ON
Focus operations disabled Focus operations enabled
The focus operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this setting is performed.)
Note: This item can be selected with the A type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the R type lens.
Setting the Frame Preset1 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-39
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed
[ ]
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
2 Move the key twice.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
Screen A
Frame2 screen
An underline appears below [Frame2].
Move the left or right key to select {PRE} or {FAST}.
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
FAST
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
Set
The display is switched to the Frame2 screen. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
The display returns to Screen A.
Frame2: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)PRESelection item
Function
FAST
Operation at the preset speed
Operation at the maximum speed
Set Set2 2Preset orMENU Set
Whether to use the preset speed or maximum speed to move to the memory position can be selected. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this speed is set.)
Note: When {PRE} is selected, set the speed. (See page E3-42)
Setting the Frame Preset2 preset speed Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-40
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF
Setting the Frame Preset2 zoom to ON or OFF
2 Move the key twice.
3 Push the key, and move the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Push the key.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
Screen A
Frame2 screen
An underline appears below [Frame2].
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Set
The display is switched to the Frame2 screen. An underline appears below [Zoom], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
This item does not appear with the "R" type lens.
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item
Function
Set Set2 2Preset orMENU Set
ON OFF
Zoom operations enabled Zoom operations disabled
The zoom operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when the setting is performed.)
Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-41
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
2 Move the key twice.
3 Push the key, and move the key twice.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Push the key.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
Screen A
Frame2 screen
An underline appears below [Frame2].
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Set
The display is switched to the Frame2 screen. An underline appears below [Focus], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item
Function
Set Set2 2 2Preset orMENU Set
OFF ON
Focus operations disabled Focus operations enabled
The focus operations up to the memory position can be enabled or disabled. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when this setting is performed.)
Note: This item can be selected with the A type lens only. There is no [Focus] display with the R type lens.
Setting the Frame Preset2 focus to ON or OFF (A type lens only) Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-42
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode
2 Move the key three times.
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
500
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
An underline appears below [ZSpeed]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
(D) Default value
(D)
2 3Preset orMENU Set
001Selection item
Function
800
Minimum speed Maximum speed
The zoom speed from any position up to the memory position can be set. There are two ways to change the speed setting: one involves using the Memo button (refer to the Lens Manual), and the other is through dis- play operations. Either way can be used, but the setting established last takes precedence.
Note: The same setting value applies to both Frame1 and Frame2.
Setting the zoom speed in the preset mode
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-43
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations
Setting the zoom start characteristics for preset operations
2 Move the key four times.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: D99
91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 50
91
5 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
An underline appears below [Start], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
ZMovement screen
An underline appears below [ZMovement].
The display is switched to the ZMovement screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
(D) Default value
(D)
2 4Preset orMENU Set Set Set
00Selection item
Function
99
Slow start Quick start
The zoom start characteristics used when preset operations have been performed can be set.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-44
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
91
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
D91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
70
2 Move the key four times.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key twice.
6 Push the key.
5 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key until the number to be changed to appears.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Set
An underline appears below [Stop], and the last setting or default value is highlighted.
Set
The display is switched to the Preset screen.
Top initial screen
Preset screen
Screen A
ZMovement screen
An underline appears below [ZMovement].
The display is switched to the ZMovement screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Default value 91
2 24Preset orMENU Set Set Set
00Selection item
Function
99
Slow stop Quick stop
The zoom stop characteristics used when preset operations have been performed can be set.
Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations
3.4 Preset Screen - Setting the zoom stop characteristics for preset operations
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-45
Page
Iris gain setting
(1) Auto iris gain setting .................................................................................................................E3-46
(2) Remote iris gain setting ...............................................................................................................E3-47
Setting the iris torque ....................................................................................................................E3-48
Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF ...............................................................................................E3-49
Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF .......................................................................................E3-50
Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.
Top
Top
Top
3.5 Iris Screen
3.5 Iris Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-46
3.5 Iris Screen - Iris gain setting
The auto iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired. There are two ways to change its setting: one involves using the auto iris gain adjusting trimmer (refer to the Lens Manual), and the other is through display operations. The setting established last takes precedence.
The same auto iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.
(1) Auto iris gain setting
The display is switched to the Iris screen.
Top initial screen
Iris screen
[I-Gain] screen
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Push the key, and move the key three times.
4 Move the key.
Set
3 Push the key.
Set
Set
The display returns to Screen A.
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 55
[ ]
5 Move the key or key.
An underline appears below [Auto]. The function set last or default value is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.
The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.
2 Move the key.
An underline appears below [I-Gain].
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
Screen A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Comp: ON Torque: High
[ ]
orSet Set2 3 SetMENU
Default value: This differs depending on the factory setting, but it is the setting established using the iris gain adjusting trimmer.
01Selection item
Function
99
Minimum gain Maximum gain
Iris [ ]
Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris op- eration
-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.
-> Set the camera s iris mode to [AUTO].
Note: Find the iris ring on the lens body, and set it to the posi- tion where the maximum gain is achieved without causing hunting.
Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Resetting" procedure described on page E3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recom- mended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be required.
Iris gain setting Top
E3-47
3.5 Iris Screen - Remote iris gain setting
The display is switched to the Iris screen.
Top initial screen
Iris screen
[I-Gain] screen
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Push the key, and move the key three times.
4 Move the key twice.
Set
3 Push the key.
Set
Set
The display returns to Screen A.
52
5 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto:
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 93 Auto: 52
[ ]
An underline appears below [Remote]. The function set last or default value is highlighted.
Move the left or right key until the value to be changed to appears.
The display is switched to the [I-Gain] screen.
2 Move the key.
An underline appears below [I-Gain].
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
Screen A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Comp: ON Torque: High
[ ]
orSet Set2 3 2 SetMENU
Default value 90
01Selection item
Function
99
Minimum gain Maximum gain
Iris [ ]
(2) Remote iris gain setting
The remote iris gain has already been set to the appropriate level at the factory but it can be changed if so desired.
The same remote iris gain setting is used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the general rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.
Note: When adjusting the gain while checking the iris operation
-> Check that the A/M switch on the drive unit is set to the [AUTO] mode.
-> Set the camera's iris mode to [Remote].
Note: The iris gain setting will not be reset even when the "Reset- ting" procedure described on page E3-6 is initiated. Since the user can no longer refer to the factory setting once this setting has been changed, it is recommended that the factory setting be noted down if it will be required.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-48
3.5 Iris Screen - Setting the iris torque
The display is switched to the Iris screen.
Top initial screen
Iris screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 Push the key, and move the key three times.
3 Move the key or key.
Set
2 Move the key twice.
Move the left or right key to select {High} or {Low}.
An underline appears below [Torque]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]
Torque: Comp: ON
High
[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]
Torque: Comp: ON
Low
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
HighSelection item
Function
Low
High operating force Low operating force
Set 2 3 2
(D) Default value
(D)
orMENU Iris [ ]
The amount of force used to manually operate the iris ring can be selected.
Setting the iris torque Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-49
3.5 Iris Screen - Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF
Setting the iris correction to ON or OFF
The display is switched to the Iris screen.
Top initial screen
Iris screen
[ -Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
This appears when ON is selected as the [Comp] setting.
1 Push the key, and move the key three times.
3 Move the key or key.
Set
2 Move the key three times.
An underline appears below [Comp]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Close: OFF
Torque: High ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Torque: High
OFF
ONSelection item
Function
OFF
Iris correction No iris correction
Set 2 3 3
(D) Default value
(D)
orMENU Iris [ ]
The light quantity drops when the extender (2.0x) is used. To compensate for this, a function for correcting the iris by opening it by an amount equivalent to 2F can be set.
Note: The iris may not close completely when the iris correction function is set to ON and the extender (2.0x) is used. If this is the case, follow the procedure for Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF, and set the detection to ON.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-50
The display is switched to the Iris screen.
Top initial screen
Iris screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
This appears when ON is selected as the [Comp] setting.
1 Push the key, and move the key three times.
3 Move the key or key.
Set
2 Move the key four times.
An underline appears below [Close]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Torque: High
ON Close: OFF
Iris [ ]
Comp: Close:
Torque: High ON ON
OFFSelection item
Function
ON
No iris close detection Iris close detection
Set 2 3 4
(D) Default value
(D)
orMENU Iris [ ]
This iris cannot be closed when the extender (2.0x) is inserted while the iris correction function is set to ON. To compensate for this, a function which closes the iris when iris close has been detected can be set.
Note: Iris close detection takes effect when the iris correction function is set to ON.
Note: Depending on the camera, it may not be possible for the iris to operate properly due to the interaction between the iris correction func- tion of the lens and the iris control exercised from the camera. At such a time, set the iris close detection to OFF.
3.5 Iris Screen - Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF
Setting the iris close detection to ON or OFF
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-51
Page
Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF ...............................................................................................E3-52
Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF ................................................................................................................E3-53
Setting the zoom servo start characteristics .........................................................................................E3-54
Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics .........................................................................................E3-55
Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics ........................................................................E3-56
Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch .....................................................................E3-57
Setting the analog demand curve characteristics ............................................................................E3-58
Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control ........................................................................E3-59
Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control .........................................................................E3-60
Setting the servo type from the zoom demand .....................................................................................E3-61
Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand ..................................................E3-62
Setting the zoom demand specifications ..............................................................................................E3-63
Top denotes an item whose setting can be changed also on the Top screen.
Top
Top
Top
3.6 Zoom Screen
3.6 Zoom Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-52
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Top initial screen
Zoom screen
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
2 Move the key.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
An underline appears below [Tracking]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF OFF
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] ON OFF
or
(D) Default value
(D) OFFSelection item
Function
ON
Zoom track disabled Zoom track enabled
Set 2 4MENU Zoom [ ]
The zoom track function can be set to ON or OFF.
Setting the zoom track to ON or OFF Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-53
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Top initial screen
Zoom screen
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
2 Move the key twice.
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
An underline appears below [F-Hold]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF OFF
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF ON
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
or
(D) Default value
(D) OFFSelection item
Function
ON
F-Hold disabled F-Hold enabled
Set 2 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]
F-Hold can be set to ON or OFF. The same F-Hold setting can be used for all the users regardless of the user who is indicated on the display. For this reason, there is no need to select the user before performing the setting. As an exception to the gen- eral rule, any change made in the setting is reected for user 0 as well.
Note: The F-Hold setting is not reset even when the steps described in resetting on page E3-6 are taken.
Note: When Iris is set as Auto, F-Hold can not be set on.
Setting F-Hold to ON or OFF
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Note: The F-Hold setting is not stored in the memory when the power is turned off. When the power is turned on again, {OFF} is established as the default setting.
E3-54
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom servo start characteristics
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Top initial screen
Zoom screen
Movement screen
Screen A
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key three times.
The display is switched to the Movement screen.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [Movement].
An underline appears below [Start]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
The display returns to Screen A.
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
97 91
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
D99 91
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
or
(D) Default value
(D) 00Selection item
Function
99
Slow start Quick start
Set SetSet2 4 3MENU Zoom [ ]
The characteristics applying when the zoom starts to move when a zoom operation is performed using a switch such as the zoom seesaw switch can be set.
Setting the zoom servo start characteristics
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-55
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics
Setting the zoom servo stop characteristics
Top initial screen
Movement screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key twice.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key three times.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [Movement].
An underline appears below [Stop]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
D91 99
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
89 99
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Screen A
Zoom screen
The display is switched to the Movement screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
or
Default value 91
00Selection item
Function
99
Slow stop Quick stop
Set SetSet2 4 3 2MENU Zoom [ ]
The characteristics applying when a zoom operation, which has been performed using a switch such as the zoom seesaw switch, is stopped can be set.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-56
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics
Setting the zoom mechanism end stop characteristics
Movement screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key three times.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Screen A
The display is switched to the Movement screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key three times.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [Movement].
An underline appears below [End]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
D99 99
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
97 99
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
(D) Default value
(D)
or
00Selection item
Function
99
Slow stop Quick stop
Set SetSet2 4 3 3MENU Zoom [ ]
The characteristics applying when a zoom operation, which has been performed using a switch such as the zoom seesaw switch, is stopped at the zoom mechanism end can be set.
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-57
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch
CurveMode screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5 5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Screen A
The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key four times.
Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj
Zoom [ ]
OFF
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [CurveMode].
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
The function set last or default function is highlighted.
D5
7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
or
D Default value
1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
Set SetSet2 4 4MENU Zoom [ ]
The characteristics of the zoom speed can be varied in response to the amount by which zoom seesaw switch is pushed in. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)
(1)
(9)
Zo om
s pe
ed
MAX
Amount by which zoom seesaw switch is pushed in Zoom direction
Wide angle Telephoto
Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment
Setting the curve characteristics of the seesaw switch Top
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-58
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the analog demand curve characteristics
CurveMode screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key twice.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5 5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key four times.
Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj
Zoom [ ]
OFF
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [CurveMode].
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
An underline appears below [Demand]. The function set last or default function highlighted.
D5
7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ] The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Screen A
The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
or
D Default value
1Selection item 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
Set SetSet2 4 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]
The characteristics of the zoom speed can be varied in response to the amount by which the analog demand is tilted. (Bear in mind that the display is switched to another screen when these characteristics are set.)
(1)
(9)
Zo om
s pe
ed
MAX
Amount by which analog demand is tilted Zoom direction
Wide angle Telephoto
Amount of change resulting from zoom mode adjustment
Setting the analog demand curve characteristics Top
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-59
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control
Setting the maximum value of the zoom speed control
SpeedAdj screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 01
R
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5 Move the key or key.
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key five times.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears. * { } denotes the direction of the default value.
An underline appears below [SpeedAdj].
An underline appears below [Max]. The function set last or default value is highlighted. * {D} denotes the default value.
CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped
Zoom [ ]
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
D99 01
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
97 01
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Screen A
The display is switched to the SpeedAdj screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
or
Default value 99
Minimum setting value 99
Set SetSet2 4 5MENU Zoom [ ]
Selection item
The value established when the maximum zoom speed control of the drive unit has been set to Max can be set.
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-60
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control
SpeedAdj screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key twice.
5 Move the key twice.
6 Push the key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 01
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
Set
Set
2 Move the key five times.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears. * { } denotes the direction of the default value.
CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped
Zoom [ ]
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
03 99
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 D01
An underline appears below [SpeedAdj].
An underline appears below [Min]. The function set last or default value is highlighted. * {D} denotes the default value.
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Screen A
The display is switched to the SpeedAdj screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Default value 01
or
01 Maxium setting value
Set SetSet2 4 5 2MENU Zoom [ ]
Selection item
The value established when the maximum zoom speed control of the drive unit has been set to Min can be set.
Setting the minimum value of the zoom speed control
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-61
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the servo type from the zoom demand
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
2 Move the key five times.
SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON
Zoom [ ]
Sped
SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON
Zoom [ ]
Posi
An underline appears below [Control]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key to select {Sped} or {Posi}.
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
or
(D) Default value
(D)SpedSelection item
Function
Posi
Speed servo Position servo
Set 2 4 6MENU Zoom [ ]
Either the speed servo or position servo can be set as the servo type from the zoom demand.
Note: When {Posi} has been selected, the seesaw switch can no longer be used. When {Posi} has been selected, only one demand connector can be connected. Normally, {Sped} is selected.
Setting the servo type from the zoom demand
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-62
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
2 Move the key seven times.
An underline appears below [VR-Dem]. The function set last or default function is highlighted.
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M
Zoom [ ]
OFF Sped
or
(D) Default value
(D) ONSelection item
Function
OFF
Enabled Disabled
Set 2 4 7MENU Zoom [ ]
The maximum zoom speed adjustment of the drive unit can be set to ON or OFF for the zoom demand.
Setting the zoom speed control to ON or OFF for the zoom demand
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-63
3.6 Zoom Screen - Setting the zoom demand specifications
3 Move the key or key.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
The display is switched to the Zoom screen.
Zoom screen
Top initial screen
1 Push the key, and move the key four times.Set
2 Move the key eight times.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [DType]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Control: VR-Dem: DType:
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
300M
Control: VR-Dem: DType:
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
300A
or
(D) Default value
(D)300MSelection item
Function
300A
When the ZSD-300M is used
When the ZSD-300A is used
Set 2 4 8MENU Zoom [ ]
Two kinds of VTR switches, a momentary type and alternate type, are provided on the zoom demand. Both of these switches can be set. Since the momentary type is normally used, select "300M." Select "300A" only when a zoom demand such as the "ZSD-300A" or "ZGA-200A" is to be used.
Setting the zoom demand specifications
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-65
Page
Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only) .................................................................E3-66
3.7 Focus Screen
3.7 Focus Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-66
or
Default value 5
1Selection item
Function
9
Large curve Small curve
Set Set Set2MENU Focus [ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Focus [ ] CurveMode
CurveMode screen 3 Push the key.
4 Move the key.
6 Push the key.
Set
Set
An underline appears below [ADemand]. The last setting or default value is highlighted.
ADemand: 5
Focus [ ] CurveMode
CurveMode ADemand: D5
Focus [ ]
CurveMode ADemand: 7
Focus [ ]
5 Move the key or key.
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
The display is switched to the Focus screen.
Screen A
The display is switched to the CurveMode screen.
The display returns to Screen A.
Focus screen
Top initial screen
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
2 Move the key.
Move the left or right key until the function to be changed to appears.
An underline appears below [CurveMode].
CurveMode Focus [ ]
The curve characteristics can be set for analog focus demand operations.
Stan da
rd
1
9
Knob position
Fo cu
s po
si tio
n
Infinity
Close range
Note: The focus demand has a curve selector switch, and these characteristics take effect when the switch has been set to FAR.
3.7 Focus Screen - Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only)
Focus demand curve characteristics (A type lenses only)
Prior to operation, select the user for whom the settings will be made. (For details on how to select the user, refer to page E2-5 or E3-4.)
IMPORTANT
E3-67
3.8 Info Screen
Page
Encoder output setting .........................................................................................................................E3-68
Initialize operation setting .....................................................................................................................E3-69
Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF ......................................................................E3-71
Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage .......................................................................................................E3-72
3.8 Info Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-68
3.8 Info Screen - Encoder output setting
The encoder output function for zoom and focus can be enabled or disabled. The encoder can be out put from the virtual connector if the setting is set as enabled. For further details, consult a Canon sales representative or your dealer.
3 Move the key or key.
The display is switched to the Info screen.
Top initial screen
Info screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 Move the key.
An underline appears below [Encoder].
Move the left or right key to set the function to {ON} or {OFF}.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
Encoder: OFF Initialize
Info
Encoder: INDOFF
INDON
Initialize
Info
Encoder: Initialize CamSeri:
Info
CamSeri:
CamSeri: ON
ON
ON
(D) Default value
(D)
2
Selection item
Function
orSet
OFF ON
Output disabled Output enabled
MENU Info 1
Encoder output setting
No need for user selection before proceeding.
(NOTE)
E3-69
3.8 Info Screen - Initialize operation setting
The system can be set the lens position when the power is turned ON. Since the lens features an encoder, the correct position of the lens must be detected each time the power is turned ON. If the initialize operation has been set to ON, then when the power is turned ON, the lens operates the initialize operation automati- cally which detects its position. If it has been set to OFF, the lens position is detected when, in the course of normal operation, the lens has passed a specific position (normally near the center). However, at the initialize operation ON setting, the same operation as for the OFF setting will be performed if the lens is set to Manual.
Servo / manual switch Selection item
Servo / manual switch Selection item
How the lens position is detected
How the lens position is detected
Servo
Servo
Manual
Manual
ON
ON
ON or OFF
ON or OFF
OFF
OFF
When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then, it returns to where it was positioned when the power was turned on. The lens position is detected while performing motorized zooming. The lens position is detected while operating the zoom ring manually.
ZOOM
Demand/ no demand
No demand
Demand
No demand
Demand
No conditions
When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then, it moves to the position of the demand's command signal.
When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then it moves to the position of the demand's command signal.
When the power is turned on, the lens operates automatically and its position is detected. Then, it returns to where it was positioned when the power was turned on.
FOCUS
The lens position is not detected. When the demand is connected, the lens position is automatically detected, and then the lens moves to the position of the demand's command signal.
The lens position is detected by operating the focus ring manually.
NOTE 1: The follow-up voltage sent back to the camera and numerical values on the Fol screen are output correctly after the lens position has been detected.
NOTE 2: The lens cannot be controlled during the initialize operation. The initialize operation is completed with the re- turn of the lens to where it was positioned before initialization commenced. However, if the lens is controlled by position, it will move to the control position rather than returning to where it was positioned before initialization commenced.
NOTE 3: When switched from manual mode to servo mode after power-up, the lens will automatically detect the position unless initialization has not been completed if the setting of initialization is auto [on].
NOTE 4: In the case of a type which does not incorporate a focus motor, the FOCUS settings cannot be performed. Operating the focus ring manually performs initialization for position detection.
NOTE 5: The initialize operation is always performed for the iris when the power is turned on. NOTE 6: When the initialize operation is set to OFF, and the lens is in the Servo condition, it is impossible to use these
functions: Shuttle Shot, Framing Preset, Speed Preset and Zoom Track because of uncompleted the lens position after
the power is turned ON. To operate those functions, perform the lens position by turning the Servo switch. NOTE 7: If the settings related to initialization are changed after the power is turned ON, the changes will not take ef-
fect. For the changes in the settings to take effect, turn the power OFF and then turn it back on.
Initialize
Error!
Initialization Error Initialize Error! appears on the display unless the lens is set to the servo mode or if the lens is mechanically locked. In such case, check the lens condition, clear the problem, and then turn off and on the power again.
Initialize operation setting
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
Error Display Screen
E3-70
3.8 Info Screen - Initialize operation setting
4 The zoom initialize operation setting is established by moving the key. The focus zoom initialize operation setting can be established by moving the key twice.
5 Move the key or key.
6 For the changes in the settings to take effect, turn the power off and then turn it back on.
Turn the power off and then turn it back on.
The display is switched to the Info screen.
Top initial screen
Info screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 Move the key twice.
An underline appears below [Initialize].
Select {Zoom} or {Focus}.
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.Set
3 Push the key.Set
Encoder: OFF
OFF Initialize
Info
Encoder: Info
Initialize Info
OFF OFF
Zoom: Focus:
Initialize Info
OFF Zoom: Focus:
OFF
Initialize Info
OFF Zoom: Focus:
ON
Initialize CamSeri: ON
CamSeri: ON
2 2or or
POWER OFF POWER ON
Set SetMENU Info
No need for user selection before proceeding.
(NOTE)
E3-71
3.8 Info Screen - Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF
As an interface between the camera and the lens, two ways of control, the serial communication control and the analog control, are used. Use this setting to switch between the automatic identification setting and the analog control setting of the interface. The default setting is ON: enabled and with this setting, the lens automatically identifies the control setting as whether the serial communication control or the analog control. Set to OFF: disabled for selecting the analog control as an interface between the lens and the camera.
The display is switched to the User screen.
Top initial screen
Info screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2 Move the key six times.
1 Push the key.Set
The display is switched to the Info screen.
3 Move the key three times.
An underline appears below [CamSeri].
4 Move the key or key.
Move the left or right key to select {ON} or {OFF}.
User screen
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Encoder: OFF
ON
Info
Initialize CamSeri:
Info
OFF
Info
CamSeri: Initialize
ON
CamSeri: Initialize
Adjust
Adjust
(D) Default value
(D)Selection item
Function
ON OFF
Camera serial communication enabled
or
Camera serial communication disabled
3Set 6MENU Info
Setting the camera serial communication to ON or OFF
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-72
3.8 Info Screen - Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage
Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage
The camera fol voltage is adjusted at the time of shipment. There is no need to change usually. However, the lens side can be changed by the situation on the camera side (indicators, etc.). The camera fol voltage is used by all users. There are the voltages sent back to the camera for zoom, iris and focus. A password is required in order to ensure that the content of the setting is not easily changed. Please contact Canon Inc. or the distributing agent when you need the password. This operation cannot be done in the analog mode.
3 Push the key.
4 Move the key or key.
5 Move the key once to select Iris.
Move the key twice to select Zoom.
Move the key three times to select Focus.
Then, push the key.
The display is switched to the Info screen.
Top initial screen
Info screen
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Continued on next page
2 Move the key four times.
An underline appears below [Adjust].
1 Push the key, and move the key twice.
Set
Set
The display is switched to the Camera Fol screen.
Set
The display now changes to the EnterPassword screen.
Set
Encoder: OFF Initialize
Info
Initialize Info
Adjust Camera Fol
CamSeri:
Adjust
Iris: Zoom: Focus:
Camera Fol
EnterPassword
ON
CamSeri: ON
E3-73
3.8 Info Screen - Adjustment of Camera Fol Voltage
7 Move the key or key.
6 Enter the password, and push the key.
Continued from Previous page
8 Move the key or key.
9 To finish, push the DISPLAY key.
To select another item, move the key.
Set
Please contact Canon Inc. or the distributing agent for the password that is needed for this operation. When the password is entered and the key is pushed, the data of the selected item is displayed. When this operation is performed for the first time, the factory default settings at the time of shipment will be displayed. These are the values that have been adjusted to each individual lens. Make a note of them in case they are to be restored.
Set F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
37150 26910
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
26910
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
26910
37150
37190
Note 1: The factory default settings at the time of shipment will not be restored even when the reset operation is changed.
Note 2: The operation is possible even in the state of the lock. Note 3: The password is invalid when the power is turned off. Note 4: If the power is turned off without taking step 9, the changed data will not be saved. Note 5: Password character input Locate the characters using the up and down keys, and move from one character to another or make
corrections using the left and right keys.
The numerical value is a rela- tive value display. Please note that making a radical change from the original value has the possibility to inuence other equipment even though it possible to select from 00000 to 65530.
Set
MENU
or
Set Set
or DISPLAY
Set
Set
42
N Password
Info Adjust
Camera Fol
Camera Fol
Selection item Selection range
Iris
Zoom
Focus
Reference: The numerical values in parentheses are the reference values for the factory defaults at the time of shipment.
F2. 8 F16
: 00000 (37150) 65530 : 00000 (26910) 65530
Wide Tele
: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530
Near Far
: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-75
3.9 Fol. Screen
Page
Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus) ....................................................................................... 3-76
3.9 Fol. Screen
M E
N U
S C
R E
E N
E3-76
Fol. 1SetMENU
The display is switched to the Fol. screen, and the iris, zoom and focus follow-up values are displayed as relative values.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
1 Move the key or key.SetFol. screen
Top initial screen
The entire ranges over which the iris, zoom and focus operate mechanically are each displayed as a relative value from 0 to 1000.
Note: The display is not automatically turned off during the Fol. screen even when no operation has been un- dertaken for more than two minutes.
To turn off the display, press the DISPLAY key.
3.9 Fol. Screen - Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus)
Lens follow-up displays (iris, zoom and focus)
E4-1
4 List of Setting
E4-2
List of Setting
Top
MENU
[ ]
[ Trk ]
A 1
V
A 2
R
[ Frm1 ]
[ Frm2 ]
AM
[ I-Tq ]
To *1 of the following page
To *3 of the following page
To *4 of the following page
Default Value PageSelecting item
VTR
Shtl
OFF
1
RET
FRM1
Norm
Zoom
H
Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0
E2-25
E2-19~E2-21
E2-22~E2-24
E2-28
E2-29
E2-4
E1-3
E2-14
E2-15
E2-16
E2-17
E2-18
[ Z.M. ]
To *2 of the following page E2-26,E2-27
OFF / ON
VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl
FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET
RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR
Norm / Reve / Auto / Manu
Zoom / Iris
H / L
E3-26 Hold down the Display sw and Set key for more than 2 seconds.
Jump to the user 0 setting status.Escape operation
[ I-Gain ]
To *5 of the following page E2-12,E2-13
E4-3
List of Setting
MENU
Zoom Focus
Iris Zoom Focus
User
Go Top
No. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9
y/n y/n
y/n y/n
/ / A Z / a z / 0 9 Name Reset
User AllUser
AllCopy
Zoom Focus
Zoom Focus
Start Stop
To No
Copy
Copy
AUX1 AUX2
Frame1
Frame2
ZSpeed ZMovement
VTR RET A/M SSaw
Switch
Preset
Auto Remote
[I-Gain]
Torque Comp Close
Iris
Seesaw Demand
Start Stop
Max Min
Tracking F-Hold
CurveMode
Movement
SpeedAdj
Control VR-Dem DType
Zoom
Focus CurveMode ADemand
#1
#2
#3
to *6
3
4
5
2
1
from *6
Iris Zoom Focus
Fol.
Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped
VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET
RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR Nomal / Revers / Auto / Manual Zoom / Iris
Shtl
VTR FRM1
Unlock Unlock/Lock
1
n y
y/ny
n n
1
RET Nomal Zoom
PRE / FASTPRE
001 ~ 800800
PRE / FASTPRE
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
High / Low ON / OFF
High
ON OFF / ONOFF
OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF
Sped / PosiSped ON / OFFON
OFF / ONOFF
OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF
< >
< >
< >
300M / 300A 300M
(0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)
00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530
(**)
1 ~ 9 1 ~ 9
5 5
00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99
99 91
End 00 ~ 9999
Minimum setting value 99 01 ~ Maximum setting value
99
1 ~ 95
01
99 91
01 ~ 99 01 ~ 99
Setting value using the iris gain adjusting trimmer
90
from *1
6
to *1
[ ]
Encoder Initialize
Adjust
Info
Default value Selecting item Page
UserCopy To Other Lens Access
( ) The setting item which is indicated within the brackets can not be changed.
#1~3 This item dies not appear with the R type lens.
< > The factory default settings established at the time of shipment can be changed. Up key operation
Set key operation Right key operation
Left key operation
E3-4 E3-5
E3-2
E3-6 E3-7
E3-8
E3-9 E3-10,E3-11 E3-12,E3-13
E3-15~E3-18 E3-28 E3-29 E3-30 E3-31 E3-32 E3-33
E3-36 E3-37 E3-38 E3-39 E3-40 E3-41
E3-42
E3-43 E3-44
E3-46 E3-47
E3-48 E3-49 E3-50
E3-52 E3-53
E3-54 E3-55 E3-56
E3-57 E3-58
E3-59 E3-60 E3-61 E3-62 E3-63
E3-66
E3-68
E3-70 E3-70
E3-76 E3-76 E3-76
E3-72 E3-72 E3-72
CamSeri ON/OFF ON E3-71
LI ST
O F
SE TT
IN G
Pb
Hg
Cd
Cr (V I)
PB B
PB DE
SJ /T
1 13
64
GB
/T 2
65 72
GB
/T 2 65 72
FO R P. R. C. O NL Y
C1
BCTV
CD-ROM
C2
.......................................................................... C2
.............................................................. C5
.......................................................... C9
......................................................... C11
............................................................... C12
1.
1.1 ............................................................ C1-2
Top ...........................................................................C1-2
MENU ..........................................................................C1-3
2. Top
2.1 Top ............................................................ C2-2
2.2 .................................................................... C2-4
(User 0 9) .............................................................C2-5
(User A) ...........................................................C2-6
(User A) ...........................................................C2-9
2.3 ......................................................... C2-12
(1) .......................................................C2-12
(2) .......................................................C2-13
2.4 ON/OFF ................................................ C2-14
2.5 AUX1 .................................................... C2-15
2.6 VTR ..................................................... C2-16
2.7 AUX2 .................................................... C2-17
2.8 RET ..................................................... C2-18
2.9 Frame Preset1 ................................................... C2-19
(1) Frame Preset1 .............................................C2-19
(2) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ..........................................C2-20
(3) Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A .........................C2-21
2.10 Frame Preset2 .................................................. C2-22
(1) Frame Preset2 ..............................................C2-22
(2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ..........................................C2-23
(3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A .........................C2-24
2.11 ........................................................ C2-25
2.12 .................................................... C2-26
(1) .......................................................C2-26
(2) .............................................C2-27
2.13 A/M .................................................... C2-28
2.14 ........................................................ C2-29
C3
3. MENU
3.1 MENU ........................................................... C3-2
3.2 User ................................................................ C3-3
(User 0 9) ............................................................C3-4
........................................................................C3-5
..............................................................................C3-6
(1) ........................................................C3-6
(2) ........................................................C3-7
................................................C3-8
.................................................................C3-10
(1) .......................................C3-10
(2) .......................................C3-12
(3) .........................................................C3-14
(User 0 9) .......................................................C3-15
(User A) ............................................................C3-19
(User A) ............................................................C3-23
.........................................................................C3-26
3.3 Switch ............................................................. C3-27
AUX1 ..............................................................C3-28
AUX2 ..............................................................C3-29
VTR ...............................................................C3-30
RET ...............................................................C3-31
A/M ...........................................................C3-32
...............................................................C3-33
3.4 Preset ............................................................. C3-35
Frame Preset1 .....................................................C3-36
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ..................................................C3-37
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A.................................C3-38
Frame Preset2 .....................................................C3-39
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ..................................................C3-40
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A .................................C3-41
.........................................................C3-42
.........................................................C3-43
.......................................................C3-44
3.5 Iris ............................................................... C3-45
...................................................................C3-46
(1) .........................................................C3-46
(2) .........................................................C3-47
...................................................................C3-48
ON/OFF ............................................................C3-49
ON/OFF ........................................................C3-50
3.6 Zoom ............................................................... C3-51
ON/OFF ..............................................................C3-52
F-Hold ON/OFF ..............................................................C3-53
...........................................................C3-54
...........................................................C3-55
.......................................................C3-56
...............................................................C3-57
.....................................................C3-58
C4
.......................................................C3-59
.......................................................C3-60
.....................................................C3-61
/ .......................................C3-62
.........................................................C3-63
3.7 Focus .............................................................. C3-65
A .....................................C3-66
3.8 Info ............................................................... C3-67
...................................................................C3-68
...................................................................C3-69
/ ...................................................C3-71
...............................................................C3-72
3.9 Fol. ............................................................... C3-75
IrisZoomFocus ...............................................C3-76
4.
.....................................................................
C5
C6
1.
2. ,
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
C7
1.
1.
1.
2.
1.
1.
C8
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
100005
89 15
: +86(0)10-8513-9999
: +86(0)10-8513-9915
C9
2.9 Frame Preset1
(1) Frame Preset1
1
2
3
4
*
*
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
(D)
Set
PRE FAST
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1
C2-19
[ Frm1 ]
T O P
C10
C11
DISPLAY
PUSH Set
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
1
2
3
4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
C2-2
Point
Fol.
Point
,
C12
C3-6
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
C1-1
1
C1-2
1.1
1.1
Top
Top
Fig.1-1
14 8
Fig.1-2
1. MENU
2.
3.
4. ON/OFF
5. AUX1
6. VTR
7. AUX2
8. RET
9. Frame Preset1
10. Frame Preset2
11.
12.
13. A/M
14.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Fig1-1
2. Top
Fig1-2
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
33 3
Top
MENU
Top 14
C1-3
1.1
MENU
3. MENU
1.User ....... Fig.1-3
2.Switch ....... Fig.1-4
3.Preset ....... Fig.1-5
4.Iris ....... Fig.1-6
5.Zoom ....... Fig.1-7
6.Focus *2 ....... Fig.1-8
7.Info. ....... Fig.1-9
8.Fol. ....... Fig.1-10
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
User
Fig1-3
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Switch
Fig1-4
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Preset
Fig1-5
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Iris
Fig1-6
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Zoom
Fig1-7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Focus
Fig1-8
CurveMode Focus [ ]
Fol.
Fig1-10
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Info
Fig1-9
Info
Initialize CamSeri: ON
Encoder: OFF
MENU
33 3 8R 7
MENU *1
*1 MENU 8
*2 R
Top MENU Set User
[ ]
1
C2-1
2 Top
C2-2
2.1 Top
2.1 Top
Top
Top 14 Top
,
1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ]
[ Frm2 ][ Frm1 ]
ZoomNormAM
Top
9 10
11 12
13 14
1
3
5
7
4
6
8
2
ShtlA 1
5
ft
m
1x
2x
A 1
A 2
V
R
AM
14
13
8
5
6
7
C2-3
2.1 Top
VTR
Frame Preset2
AUX1
AUX2
A/M
Frame Preset1
C2-14
C2-16
C2-15
C2-17
C3-1
1
2
3
4
9
10
11
12[Trk]
A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]
MENUMENU
[ I-Tq ] [ I-Gain ]
[ Frm2 ]
[ Frm1 ]
AM
RET
C2-22
C2-12
C2-29
C2-28
C2-25
C2-19
C2-18
C2-4 C2-5 C2-6 C2-9
C2-26
[ Z.M. ]
13
14
5
7
6
8
C2-4
2.2
2.2
[ ]
User 1 9
9User 1 9
User 0
User 1 9 User User0
User0 EscapeC3-26User 0
F-Hold
User A ( )
( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
C2-6 C2-11
C2-5
2.2 - (User 0 9)
(User 0 9) [ ]
Top User 0 9UserA
User 0 9 MENU 3. MENU User A
[ ] 1
[ ] 2
Set
1
2
Set4
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 2
Top
SetMENU [ ] 1 Set
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
C2-6
2.2 - (User A)
(User A)[ ]
User A ( )
( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Unlock
Lock Unlock
8
( )
C2-7
2.2 - (User A)
1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
Set
3
4
5
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
Top
MENU [ ] 1 Set [ ] A Set Set
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
(1)
[ ]
C2-8
2.2 - (User A)
(D)
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
(D)
(D) Unlock Lock
MENU [ ] 1 [ ] ASet Set Set
Set Set
1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
Set
3
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ ] A I G : 5 0
EnterPassword
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
4
Set
Set
5
6
7
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
Top
(2)
[ ]
C2-9
2.2 - (User A)
(User A) [ ]
Unlock
(1)
1 Set
[ ] A
3 Set
2
I G : 50
I G : 55
[ ] A
I G : 5 0
I G : 5 5
SetSet
01 99
I G : 5 0
User A ( )
( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
C2-10
2.2 - (User A)
(2)
1 Set
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3 Set
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
I :
(Unlock)
SetSet I G : 5 0
[ ]
C2-11
2.2 - (User A)
1 Set
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
2
I :
EnterPassword
Set3
Set4
Set
Set
5
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
(Lock )
Set Set Set Set
Set
(D)
I G : 5 0
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
[ ]
C2-12
2.3 -
(1)
--> A/M
AUTO
-->
AUTO
hunting
C3-6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Set
5 Set
4
Top
I-Gain
3
1
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 73
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 73
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 71
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
A
Set
01 99
MENU Set[ I-Gain ]
2.3 [ I-Gain ]
C2-13
2.3 -
(2)
--> A/M
AUTO
-->
Remote
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Set
5 Set
4
Top
I-Gain
3
1
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 80 Auto: 48
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
A
Set
01 99
MENU Set 2[ I-Gain ]
C3-6
[ I-Gain ]
C2-14
2.4 ON/OFF
ON/OFF
1
2
4
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
[Trk]OFF
[Trk]ON
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]ON Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
(D)
(D)
Set
OFF ON
MENU Set[Trk]OFF
2.4 ON/OFF
C2-5 C3-4
[Trk]
C2-15
2.5 AUX1
AUX1
Set
1
2
Set4
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ShtlA 1
VTRA 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF VTR VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
Set2
Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
MENU SetShtlA 1
2.5 AUX1 A 1
C2-5 C3-4
C2-16
2.6 VTR
VTR
Set
1
2
Set4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl RETA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
VTRV
RETV
3
Top
2 Set
(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
MENU SetVTRV
2.6 VTR V
C2-5 C3-4
C2-17
2.7 AUX2
AUX2
Set
1
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
ShtlA 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
FRM1A 2
ShtlA 2
Set4
3
Top
3 SetMENU SetA 1 FRM1A 2
Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped
2.7 AUX2 A 2
C2-5 C3-4
C2-18
2.8 RET
RET
Set
1
2
Set4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
RETR
FRM2R
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
FRM2R
[ ]MENU
3
Top
3 Set
(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
MENU SetA 1 RETR
2.8 RET R
C2-5 C3-4
C2-19
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1
(1)Frame Preset1
PRE C3-42
1
2
3
4
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
"R"
(D)
Set
PRE FAST
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
2.9 Frame Preset1 [ Frm1 ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-20
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
(2)Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
A
Set
Set
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON "R"
(D)
Set
ON OFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
[ Frm1 ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-21
2.9 Frame Preset1 - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A
(3)Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A
ARFocus
1
2
3
5
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
4
(D)
(D)
Set2
ONOFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm1 ]
[ Frm1 ]
C2-5 C3-4
ARFocus
C2-22
2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2
(1) Frame Preset2
PRE C3-42
1
2
3
4
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
"R"
(D)
Set
PRE FAST
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]
2.10 Frame Preset2 [ Frm2 ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-23
2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
(2) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
1
2
3
4
5
Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
A
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
"R"
(D)
Set
ON OFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ]
[ Frm2 ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-24
2.10 Frame Preset2 - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A
(3) Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A
ARFocus
1
2
3
5
Top
A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Set
Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
4
1
[ I-Tq ] H [ Z.M. ] [ Frm1 ]
FRM1A 2 RETR
[ ]MENU
[ Frm2 ]
(D)
Set
ONOFF
MENU Set4 [ Frm2 ] 2
[ Frm2 ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-25
2.11
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2 Set
4 Set
1
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] L
[ I-Tq ] H
[ I-Tq ] L
3
Top
(D)
Set
H L
MENU Set5 [ I-Tq ] H
2.11 [ I-Tq ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-26
2.12 -
(1)
2
4
CurveMode
A
3
5
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
[ Z.M. ] Zoom
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw: 5
5
[ ]
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
D5 5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
3 5
A
Top
CurveMode
1
[ Z.M. ]MENU Set Set5
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
(1)
(9)
MAX
2.12 [ Z.M. ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-27
2.12 -
(2)
2
4
CurveMode
A
3
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
[ Z.M. ]
1
Zoom
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Set
Set
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw: 5
5
[ ]
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
D5
8 5
5
A
CurveMode
Top
[ Z.M. ] 2 SetMENU Set
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
5
(1)
(9)
MAX
[ Z.M. ]
C2-5 C3-4
C2-28
2.13 A/M
A/M
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM
ReveAM
Set
1
2
Set4
3
Top
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
NormAM
[ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ] [ ]MENU 1
Zoom [ Z.M. ][ I-Tq ] H
ReveAM
(D)
Set
Norm Reve
A Auto / M Manual A Manual / M Auto A Auto / M Auto A Manual / M Manual
Auto Manu
Auto Only Manual Only
MENU Set6 NormAM
2.13 A/M AM
C2-5 C3-4
C2-29
2.14
ZoomIris
1
2 MANUAL
3 TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE
4 C3-59
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Zoom
Iris
Set
1
2
Set4
3
Top
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Zoom [ Z.M. ]
[ I-Tq ] H [ Frm1 ] [ Frm2 ]
[ ]MENU 1
NormAM Iris [ Z.M. ]
(D)
Set
Zoom Iris
MENU Set6 Zoom
2.14
C2-5 C3-4
C3-1
3 MENU
C3-2
3.1 MENU
3.1 MENU
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1 [ ] A I G : 5 0
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 ShtlNo. :
User 1
Name: ResetAll
1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
: Go Top : BackSet
Set
Set
Set
1 2
3
4
56
7
8
C3-27
C3-51
C3-67 C3-35
C3-65
C3-31
2
3
5
6
7
C3-454 C3-758
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ] CurveMode
Focus [ ]
Info Encoder: Initialize
OFF
(A)
(A )
(0 9)
(0 9)
CamSeri: ON
MENU 33 3
MENU User Switch Preset Iris Zoom
Focus A Info Fol. 8R 7
Top MENU Set User
7
MENU 8
Top Top
C3-3
3.2 User
3.2 User
User 1 9
9 User 1 9
User 0
User1 9User A
User 0
C3-26 User 0
F-Hold
User A ( )
( )
,
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
C3-19 C3-25
(User 0 9) ....................................................C3-4
.....................................................................C3-5
(1) .....................................................C3-6
(2) .....................................................C3-7
.............................................C3-8
(1) ....................................C3-10
(2) ....................................C3-12
(3) ......................................................C3-14
(User 0 9) ....................................................C3-15
(User A) .........................................................C3-19
(User A) .........................................................C3-23
......................................................................C3-26
Top
Top Top
Top
Top
C3-4
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
(User 0 9)
Top
User
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3
1 Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
2 2
SetMENU Set User 1
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
User 0 9User AUser A
C3-19 C3-25 User No.
Top
C3-5
3.2 User -
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Set
Set
Name User
Name:
1
Set5
Name User
Name: A
1
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
A
Top
User
Name
4
SetMENU Set User 1 Set2
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C2-5 C3-4
Top
C3-6
3.2 User -
2
3
4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
User 1 Reset Now.
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
1 Set
Set
Set6
Reset
5
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
A
A
Top
User
Reset
Reset
Reset
SetMENU Set User 1 Set3
(1)
1 5
F-Hold
C2-5 C3-4
C3-7
3.2 User -
2
3
4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
All User Reset Now.
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
Name: User
ResetAll Copy
1
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
1 Set
Set
Set6
5
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
A
A
Top
User
Reset
Reset
Reset
ResetAll User
User: AllUser:
1
y/n y/n
SetMENU Set User 1 Set3 2
(2)
1 5
F-Hold
C3-8
3.2 User -
3
6
5
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
3 y/n
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
1 y/n
1 Set
2
4
Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User
A
Copy
1 7
C2-5 C3-4
C3-9
3.2 User -
Set
MENU Set User 1 Set4
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
Set8 A
7
Copy User
To No. : Copy:
1
3 y/n
C3-10
3.2 User -
C3-
12
(1)
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
1 Set
2
4
Set
Set
5
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User
A
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
B
ToOtherLens
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
6
7
1 12
1.20P-20P20
2.
3.
C2-5 C3-4
C3-11
3.2 User -
Set
SetMENU
Set
Set User 1 Set5
8
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
1 y/n
10
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 1
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
11
9
Set13
12
Now Data Copy Please Wait...
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
A
Set
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
ToOtherLens User
To No. : Copy:
1
y/n 3
2
1
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
*1 Set
*2
C3-14 (3)
C3-12
3.2 User -
(2)
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
ResetAll User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
Connect:
1
y/n
1 Set
2
Set
4
Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User
A
ToOtherLens
5
6
110
1. 20P-20P20
2.
3.
C3-13
3.2 User -
Set
B
y/n
9
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
AllCopy
Set11
10
Now Data Copy Please Wait...
A ResetAll
User
Copy ToOtherLens
1
A
7
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
ToOtherLens User
ToAllUser Copy:
1
y/n
2
1
8
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n y/n
ToOtherLens User
UserCopy : AllCopy :
1
y/n
Set
SetMENU Set User 1 Set
Set
5
2
*1 Set
*2
C3-14 (3)
C3-14
3.2 User -
(3)
Lens Connect Error!!
Copy Error!!
User Copy ToOtherLens
1
A
Access: Unlock
C3-15
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
C3-19 C3-22
Lock
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User
User Copy ToOtherLens
1
Access: Unlock Set3
Set1
Unlock Lock
[ ] Lock [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1 [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU
(User 0 9)
Lock Unlock
8
Lock
(ShtlShot FramePreset PresetSpeed)
ZoomTrack ON/OFF
AutoIrisGain
F-Hold
User No. 0 9 Unlock
User No. Lock Lock
C3-16
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY
(D) Unlock Lock
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Set
Set
4
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
5
6
User Copy
1
ToOtherLens Access: Lock
Lock Unlock
8
C3-17
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
Unlock
Unlock
Unlock 1
Set Set[ ] Lock
(D) Unlock Lock
2
[ ] 1
Top
1 MENU
MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ] Lock
MENU [ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF
Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
Set
Set
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
5
6
3
Set4
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ] Lock
[ ] Lock
C3-18
3.2 User - (User 0 9)
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
MENU [ ] Lock
2
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Top
User 1 Set
1
1
User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Lock
Set3
Set
Set
4
EnterPassword
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
5
6
User Copy ToOtherLens Access: Unlock
Unlock 2
SetSet Set Set6 DISPLAY
C3-19
3.2 User - (User A)
User A ( )
( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
Unlock
(User A)
Lock Unlock
8
Top
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
C3-20
3.2 User - (User A)
(1)
Top
User
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3
[ ] A I G : 5 0
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
1 Set
4 Set
5 Set
6
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
A A
SetMENU SetSet User 1
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
C3-21
3.2 User - (User A)
(2)
Top
User
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
3
EnterPassword
Set6
AnalogMode Lock / Unlock
Set5
EnterPassword
Lock OK? y/n
1 Set
4 Set
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
1 1
No. : User
Name: ResetAll
A A
C3-22
3.2 User - (User A)
8 [ ] LockI G : 5 0
Set7
Set Set DISPLAY
(D) Unlock Lock
0 (D)1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A
SetMENU SetSet User 1
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Lock Unlock
8
C3-23
3.2 User - (User A)
[ ] A I G : 5 0 I G : 5 0 [ ] Lock
Unlock
(1)
1 Set
[ ] A
3 Set
2
I G : 50
I G : 55
[ ] A
I G : 5 0
I G : 5 5
SetSet
01 99
I G : 5 0
User A ( )
( )
VTRRETIRIS A/MIRIS INST
AUX1AUX2MEMO
(User A) Top
C3-24
3.2 User - (User A)
(2)
1 Set
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3 Set
2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
I :
(Unlock )
SetSet I G : 5 0
C3-25
3.2 User - (User A)
1 Set
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
[ ] Lock I G : 5 0
2
I :
EnterPassword
Set3
Set4
Set
Set
5
EnterPassword
Unlock OK? y/n
[ ] A I G : 5 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
(Lock )
Set Set Set Set
Set
(D)
I G : 5 0
(D) A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
1 Set
2
User 0 Reset Now
Escape To User 0 Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
SetandDISPLAY[ ]
User 0 9 User A User0
(1) User 0 9
(2) User A ( )
1 Set
2
Escape To User 0 Top
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 0
[ ] A I G : 5 0
3.2 User -
C3-26
F-Hold
Lock
C3-27
AUX1 ......................................................... C3-28
AUX2 ......................................................... C3-29
VTR .......................................................... C3-30
RET .......................................................... C3-31
A/M .......................................................... C3-32
.......................................................... C3-33
Top Top.
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
3.3.Switch
3.3.Switch
C3-28
3.3.Switch - AUX1
Shtl(D) NON VTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
MENU Set Switch 1
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 SetSwitch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2 FRM1 Shtl
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2 FRM1 VTR
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
AUX1.
AUX1
C2-5.C3-4.
Top
C3-29
3.3.Switch - AUX2
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2
3
1 SetSwitch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2
Shtl FRM1
Switch 1
VTR:V VTR
AUX1:A 1
AUX2:A 2
Shtl Sped
Shtl(D) NON VTR RETFRM1 FRM2 Sped
2MENU Set Switch 1
AUX2
AUX2 Top
C2-5.C3-4.
C3-30
3.3.Switch - VTR
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
RET:R RET
AUX2:A 2
VTR:V
FRM1 VTR
Switch 1
RET:R RET
AUX2:A 2
VTR:V
FRM1 RET
2
3
1 SetSwitch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
3MENU Set Switch 1
(D) ShtlVTR RET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
VTR
VTR Top
C2-5.C3-4.
C3-31
3.3.Switch - RET
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
2
3
1 SetSwitch
Top
Switch 1
A/M:AM Normal
VTR:V
RET:R
VTR RET
Switch 1
A/M:AM Normal
VTR:V
RET:R
VTR Sped
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
4MENU Set Switch 1
(D) Shtl VTRRET FRM1 FRM2 Sped
RET
RET Top
C2-5.C3-4.
C3-32
3.3.Switch - A/M
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET
Zoom Normal
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET
Zoom Revers
2
3
1 SetSwitch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
5MENU Set Switch 1
(D)Normal Revers Auto Manual
A/M
A/M Top
C2-5.C3-4.
C3-33
3.3.Switch -
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET Normal
Zoom
Switch 1
SSaw: A/M:AM
RET:R RET Normal
Iris
2
3
1 SetSwitch
Top
Switch 1
VTR:V
A 1
AUX2:A 2
VTR
AUX1: FRM1 Shtl
6MENU Set Switch 1
(D)Zoom Iris
ZoomIris
1.
2. MANUAL
AUTO/REMOTE
3. TELE OPEN WIDE CLOSE
4. C3-59.
Top
C2-5.C3-4.
C3-35
Frame Preset1 ..............................................C3-36
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF ...........................................C3-37
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A .......................C3-38
Frame Preset2 ...............................................C3-39
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF ............................................C3-40
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A ........................C3-41
.......................................................C3-42
.......................................................C3-43
.....................................................C3-44
Top Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
Top
3.4 Preset
3.4 Preset
C3-36
3.4 Preset - Frame Preset1
2
3
4
5
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
A
A
Frame1
"R"
1 Set
Set
Set
Frame1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
(D)PRE FAST
Set Set2 PresetMENU Set
PRE C3-42
Frame Preset1
C2-5 C3-4
Top
C3-37
3.4 Preset - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame1: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
1 Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
4
5
Top
A
A
Frame1
Set
Frame1 "R"
(D)
Set Set2 PresetMENU Set
ON OFF
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF Top
C2-5 C3-4
C3-38
3.4 Preset - Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
FAST Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
2
3
1 Set
Set
4
5
Top
A
A
Frame1
Set
Frame1
(D)
Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set
OFF ON
ARFocus
Frame Preset1 ON/OFF A Top
C2-5 C3-4
C3-39
3.4 Preset - Frame Preset2
[ ]
2
3
4
5
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Top
A
A
Frame2
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
FAST
1 Set
Set
Set
Frame2
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
FAST
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
"R"
(D)PRE FAST
Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set
PRE C3-42
Frame Preset2 Top
C2-5 C3-4
C3-40
3.4 Preset - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Preset
Frame2: PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: OFF
Preset
1 Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
4
5
Top
A
A
Frame2
Set
Frame2
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
"R"
(D)
Set Set2 2PresetMENU Set
ON OFF
Top
C2-5 C3-4
C3-41
3.4 Preset - Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: OFF Zoom: ON
Frame2: Preset
PRE
Focus: ON Zoom: ON
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
2
3
1 Set
Set
4
5
Top
A
A
Frame2
Set
Frame2
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: ZSpeed: 800
PRE
(D)
Set Set2 2 2PresetMENU Set
OFF ON
ARFocus
Frame Preset2 ON/OFF A Top
C2-5 C3-4
C3-42
3.4 Preset -
2
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1 Set
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
500
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Top
(D)
2 3PresetMENU Set
001 800
Memo
Frame1Frame2
C2-5 C3-4
C3-43
3.4 Preset -
2
3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: D99
91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 50
91
5
1 Set
Set
Set
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Top
A
ZMovement
ZMovement
(D)
2 4PresetMENU Set Set Set
00 99
C2-5 C3-4
C3-44
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
Frame2: Preset
PRE ZSpeed: ZMovement
800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
91
Frame1: Preset
PRE Frame2: PRE ZSpeed: 800
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
D91
Preset ZMovement
Stop: Start: 99
70
2
3
4
6
5
1 Set
Set
Set
Top
A
ZMovement ZMovement
91
2 24PresetMENU Set Set Set
00 99
3.4 Preset -
C2-5 C3-4
C3-45
(1) .....................................................C3-46
(2) .......................................................C3-47
.............................................................C3-48
ON/OFF .........................................................C3-49
ON/OFF .....................................................C3-50
Top Top
Top
Top
Top
3.5 Iris
3.5 Iris
C3-46
3.5 Iris -
(1)
Iris
Top
Iris
[I-Gain]
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1
4
Set
3
Set
Set
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 55
[ ]
5
[I-Gain]
2
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Comp: ON Torque: High
[ ]
Set Set2 3 SetMENU
01 99
Iris [ ]
--> A/M
AUTO
-->
Remote
hunt-
ing
C3-6
Top
C3-47
3.5 Iris -
Iris
Top
Iris
[I-Gain]
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1
4
Set
3
Set
Set
52
5
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto:
[ ]
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 93 Auto: 52
[ ]
[I-Gain]
2
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Remote: 90 Auto: 52
[ ]
A
[ I-Gain ] Iris
Comp: ON Torque: High
[ ]
Set Set2 3 2 SetMENU
90
01 99
Iris [ ]
(2)
--> A/M
AUTO
-->
Remote
C3-6
C3-48
3.5 Iris -
Iris
Top
Iris
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1
3
Set
2
[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]
Torque: Comp: ON
High
[ I-Gain ] Iris [ ]
Torque: Comp: ON
Low
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
High Low
Set 2 3 2
(D)
MENU Iris [ ]
C2-5 C3-4
Top
C3-49
3.5 Iris - ON/OFF
ON/OFF
Iris
Top
Iris
[ -Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1
3
Set
2
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Close: OFF
Torque: High ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Torque: High
OFF
ON OFF
Set 2 3 3
(D)
MENU Iris [ ]
2.0x 2F
ON2.0x
ON/OFF ON
C2-5 C3-4
C3-50
Iris
Top
Iris
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF Shtl VTRA 1
FRM1A 2
V
RETR
[ ]MENU 1
1
3
Set
2
Iris [ ] [ I-Gain ] Torque: High Comp: ON
Iris [ ]
Comp: Torque: High
ON Close: OFF
Iris [ ]
Comp: Close:
Torque: High ON ON
OFF ON
Set 2 3 4
(D)
MENU Iris [ ]
ON2.0x
ON
OFF
3.5 Iris - ON/OFF
ON/OFF
C2-5 C3-4
C3-51
ON/OFF ........................................................... C3-52
F-Hold ON/OFF ............................................................ C3-53
.......................................................... C3-54
.......................................................... C3-55
...................................................... C3-56
............................................................ C3-57
.................................................. C3-58
...................................................... C3-59
...................................................... C3-60
.................................................... C3-61
/...................................... C3-62
........................................................ C3-63
Top Top.
Top
Top
Top
3.6.Zoom
3.6.Zoom
C3-52
3.6.Zoom - ON/OFF
Zoom
Top
Zoom
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 Set
2
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF OFF
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] ON OFF
(D) OFF ON
Set 2 4MENU Zoom [ ]
ON/OFF
C2-5. C3-4.
Top
C3-53
3.6.Zoom -.F-Hold ON/OFF
Zoom
Top
Zoom
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
1 Set
2
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF OFF
Tracking F-Hold: Movement
Zoom [ ] OFF ON
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
(D) OFF ON
Set 2 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]
F-Hold. /.
F-Hold.
0
F-Hold. C3-6
F-Hold. OFF F-Hold OFF
F-Hold ON
F-Hold ON/OFF
C3-54
3.6.Zoom -
Zoom
Top
Zoom
Movement
A
3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5
1 Set
Set
Set
2
Movement
A
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
97 91
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
D99 91
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
(D) 00 99
Set SetSet2 4 3MENU Zoom [ ]
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-55
3.6.Zoom -
Top
Movement 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5
1 Set
Set
Set
2
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
D91 99
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
89 99
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
Zoom
A
Zoom
Movement
A
91
00 99
Set SetSet2 4 3 2MENU Zoom [ ]
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-56
3.6.Zoom -
Movement 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RETR
5
Zoom
A
Movement
A
Zoom
Top
1 Set
Set
Set
2
Movement Zoom
Stop: Start:
[ ]
99 91
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
D99 99
Movement Zoom
End: Stop:
[ ]
97 99
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
F-Hold: Movement CurveMode
Zoom [ ]
(D) 00 99
Set SetSet2 4 3 3MENU Zoom [ ]
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-57
3.6.Zoom -
CurveMode 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5 5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5
Zoom
A
CurveMode
A
Zoom
Top
1 Set
Set
Set
2
Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj
Zoom [ ]
OFF
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
D5
7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
Set SetSet2 4 4MENU Zoom [ ]
(1)
(9)
MAX
Top
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-58
3.6.Zoom -
CurveMode 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5 5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5
1 Set
Set
Set
2
Movement CurveMode SpeedAdj
Zoom [ ]
OFF
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
CurveMode Zoom
Demand: Seesaw:
[ ]
5
D5
7
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ] Zoom
A
CurveMode
A
Zoom
Top
1 2 3 4 D5 6 7 8 9
Set SetSet2 4 4 2MENU Zoom [ ]
(1)
(9)
MAX
Top
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-59
3.6.Zoom -
SpeedAdj 3
4
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
[ ]MENU 1
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 01
R
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
5
1 Set
Set
Set
2
CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped
Zoom [ ]
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
D99 01
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
97 01
Zoom
A
SpeedAdj
A
Zoom
Top
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
99
Min 99
Set SetSet2 4 5MENU Zoom [ ]
Max
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-60
3.6.Zoom -
SpeedAdj 3
4
5
6
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 01
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
1 Set
Set
Set
2
CurveMode SpeedAdj Control: Sped
Zoom [ ]
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
03 99
SpeedAdj Zoom
Min: Max:
[ ]
99 D01
Zoom
A
SpeedAdj
A
Zoom
Top
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
01
01 Max
Set SetSet2 4 5 2MENU Zoom [ ]
Min
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-61
3.6.Zoom -
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Zoom
Zoom
Top
1 Set
2
SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON
Zoom [ ]
Sped
SpeedAdj Control: VR-Dem: ON
Zoom [ ]
Posi
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
(D)Sped Posi
Set 2 4 6MENU Zoom [ ]
.Posi
. Posi
. Sped
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-62
3.6.Zoom - /.
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Zoom
Zoom
Top
1 Set
2
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
Control: VR-Dem: DType: 300M
Zoom [ ]
OFF Sped
(D) ON OFF
Set 2 4 7MENU Zoom [ ]
/.
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-63
3.6.Zoom -
3
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Zoom
Zoom
Top
1 Set
2
Tracking: F-Hold: OFF
OFF
Movement
Zoom [ ]
Control: VR-Dem: DType:
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
300M
Control: VR-Dem: DType:
Zoom [ ]
ON Sped
300A
(D)300M 300A
Set 2 4 8MENU Zoom [ ]
VTR momentary alternate
momentary 300M
ZSD-300AZGA-200A300A
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-65
A.................................... C3-66
3.7.Focus
3.7.Focus
C3-66
5
1 9
Set Set Set2MENU Focus [ ]
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Focus [ ] CurveMode
CurveMode 3
4
6
Set
Set
ADemand: 5
Focus [ ] CurveMode
CurveMode ADemand: D5
Focus [ ]
CurveMode ADemand: 7
Focus [ ]
5
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
Focus
A
CurveMode
A
Focus
Top
1 Set
2
CurveMode Focus [ ]
Stan da
rd
1
9
FAR
3.7.Focus -A
A
C2-5. C3-4.
C3-67
3.8 Info
................................................................. C3-68
................................................................. C3-69
/ ................................................. C3-71
............................................................. C3-72
3.8 Info
C3-68
3.8 Info -
Zoom Focus
3
Info
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2
1 Set
Encoder: OFF Initialize
Info
Encoder: INDOFF
INDON
Initialize
Info
Encoder: Initialize CamSeri:
Info
CamSeri:
CamSeri: ON
ON
ON
(D)
2Set
OFF ON
MENU Info 1
C3-69
3.8 Info -
ONOFF
( )ON
Manual OFF
ON
ON OFF
OFF
ZOOM
ON
OFF
FOCUS
ON OFF
1 Fol.
2
3 ON
4 FOCUS
5
6 OFF
7
Initialize
Error!
C3-70
3.8 Info -
4
5
6
Info
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2
1 Set
3 Set
Encoder: OFF
OFF Initialize
Info
Encoder: Info
Initialize Info
OFF OFF
Zoom: Focus:
Initialize Info
OFF Zoom: Focus:
OFF
Initialize Info
OFF Zoom: Focus:
ON
Initialize CamSeri: ON
CamSeri: ON
2 2
POWER OFF POWER ON
Set SetMENU Info
C3-71
3.8 Info - /
2
User
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2
1 Set
Info
3
4
User
No. : User
1 Name: ResetAll
1
Encoder: OFF
ON
Info
Initialize CamSeri:
Info
OFF
Info
CamSeri: Initialize
ON
CamSeri: Initialize
Adjust
Adjust
(D) ON OFF
3Set 6MENU Info
/
C3-72
3.8 Info -
IrisZoomFocus
3
4
5
Info
Top
Info
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
2
1
Set
Set
Camera Fol
Set
EnterPassword
Set
Encoder: OFF Initialize
Info
Initialize Info
Adjust Camera Fol
CamSeri:
Adjust
Iris: Zoom: Focus:
Camera Fol
EnterPassword
ON
CamSeri: ON
C3-73
3.8 Info -
7
6
8
9
Set
Set
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
37150 26910
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
26910
F2.8: F16:
Camera Fol
26910
37150
37190
1
2
3 OFF
4 9
5
0000065530
Set
MENU
Set Set
DISPLAY
Set
Set
42
N
Info Adjust
Camera Fol
Camera Fol
Iris
Zoom
Focus
F2. 8 F16
: 00000 (37150) 65530 : 00000 (26910) 65530
Wide Tele
: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530
Near Far
: 00000 (05000) 65530 : 00000 (52000) 65530
C3-75
3.9 Fol.
IrisZoomFocus .............................................C3-76
3.9 Fol.
C3-76
Fol. 1SetMENU
Fol.
[ I-Gain ] [Trk]OFF A 1
A 2
V
R
[ ]MENU 1
Fol. Iris: Zoom: Focus:
0940 0527
0011
1
Shtl VTR FRM1 RET
1 SetFol.
Top
0 1000 IrisZoomFocus
Fol. 2
3.9 Fol. -IrisZoomFocus
IrisZoomFocus
C4-1
4
C4-2
Top
MENU
[ ]
[ Trk ]
A 1
V
A 2
R
[ Frm1 ]
[ Frm2 ]
AM
[ I-Tq ]
VTR
Shtl
OFF
1
RET
FRM1
Norm
Zoom
H
Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0
C2-25
C2-19~C2-21
C2-22~C2-24
C2-28
C2-29
C2-4
C1-3
C2-14
C2-15
C2-16
C2-17
C2-18
[ Z.M. ]
C2-26,C2-27
OFF / ON
VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl
FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET
RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR
Norm / Reve / Auto / Manu
Zoom / Iris
H / L
C3-26
[ I-Gain ]
C2-12,C2-13
C4-3
MENU
Zoom Focus
Iris Zoom Focus
User
Go Top
No. 1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9 / A / 0
1 / 2 / 3 / 4 / 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 / 9
y/n y/n
y/n y/n
/ / A Z / a z / 0 9 Name Reset
User AllUser
AllCopy
Zoom Focus
Zoom Focus
Start Stop
To No
Copy
Copy
AUX1 AUX2
Frame1
Frame2
ZSpeed ZMovement
VTR RET A/M SSaw
Switch
Preset
Auto Remote
[I-Gain]
Torque Comp Close
Iris
Seesaw Demand
Start Stop
Max Min
Tracking F-Hold
CurveMode
Movement
SpeedAdj
Control VR-Dem DType
Zoom
Focus CurveMode ADemand
#1
#2
#3
3
4
5
2
1
Iris Zoom Focus
Fol.
Shtl / NON / VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped
VTR / RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / NON / VTR / RET
RET / FRM1 / FRM2 / Sped / Shtl / VTR Nomal / Revers / Auto / Manual Zoom / Iris
Shtl
VTR FRM1
Unlock Unlock/Lock
1
n y
y/ny
n n
1
RET Nomal Zoom
PRE / FASTPRE
001 ~ 800800
PRE / FASTPRE
ON / OFF
ON / OFF
OFF / ON
OFF / ON
00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
High / Low ON / OFF
High
ON OFF / ONOFF
OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF
Sped / PosiSped ON / OFFON
OFF / ONOFF
OFF / ONOFF OFF / ONOFF
< >
< >
< >
300M / 300A 300M
(0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)(**) (0000 ~ 1000)
00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530 00000 ~ 65530
(**)
1 ~ 9 1 ~ 9
5 5
00 ~ 99 00 ~ 99
99 91
End 00 ~ 9999
Min 99 01 ~ Max
99
1 ~ 95
01
99 91
01 ~ 99 01 ~ 9990
6
[ ]
Encoder Initialize
Adjust
Info
UserCopy To Other Lens Access
C3-4 C3-5
C3-2
C3-6 C3-7
C3-8
C3-9 C3-10,C3-11 C3-12,C3-13
C3-15~C3-18 C3-28 C3-29 C3-30 C3-31 C3-32 C3-33
C3-36 C3-37 C3-38 C3-39 C3-40 C3-41
C3-42
C3-43 C3-44
C3-46 C3-47
C3-48 C3-49 C3-50
C3-52 C3-53
C3-54 C3-55 C3-56
C3-57 C3-58
C3-59 C3-60 C3-61 C3-62 C3-63
C3-66
C3-68
C3-70 C3-70
C3-76 C3-76 C3-76
C3-72 C3-72 C3-72
CamSeri ON/OFF ON C3-71
AUX..........................................................................................................2-15,.3-28 FOCUS.............................................................................................................. 3-65 FRAME.PRESET.....................................................................................2-19,.3-35 RET..........................................................................................................2-18,.3-31 VTR..........................................................................................................2-16,.3-30 ........................................................................................2-12,.3-46 ........................................................................................2-25,.3-48 ..................................................................................................... 3-68 ................................................................................................. 3-71 ............................................................................................2-26,.3-54 ........................................................................................2-14,.3-52 ...................................................................................................3-72,.3-75 .......................................................................................................2-4,.3-3
INDEX AUX....................................................................................................2-15,.3-28 CAMERA.FOL....................................................................................3-72,.3-75 CAMERA.SERIAL.......................................................................................3-71 ENCODER..................................................................................................3-68 FOCUS........................................................................................................3-65 FRAME.PRESET...............................................................................2-19,.3-35 IRIS.GAIN..........................................................................................2-12,.3-46 IRIS.TORQUE....................................................................................2-25,.3-48 RET....................................................................................................2-18,.3-31 USER.....................................................................................................2-4,.3-3 VTR....................................................................................................2-16,.3-30 ZOOM.CURVE...................................................................................2-26,.3-54 ZOOM.TRACK...................................................................................2-14,.3-52
AUX.........................................................................................C2-15,.C3-28 FOCUS............................................................................................... C3-65 FRAME.PRESET....................................................................C2-19,.C3-35 RET.........................................................................................C2-18,.C3-31 VTR.........................................................................................C2-16,.C3-30 ..................................................................................C2-26,.C3-54 ..................................................................................C2-14,.C3-52 ................................................................................................. C3-68 .........................................................................................C3-72,.C3-75 ..................................................................................C2-25,.C3-48 ..................................................................................C2-12,.C3-46 ......................................................................................... C3-71 .............................................................................................C2-4,.C3-3
AMERICAS Canada Canon Canada, Inc.
Broadcast and Communications Div.
6390 Dixie Road, Mississauga, Ontario, L5T 1P7, Canada
Tel:+1(905)795-2012 Fax:+1(905)795-2087 Mexico Canon Mexicana, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Call Center Div.
Blvd. Manuel Avila Camacho No,138,
Col. Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F.
Tel:+52 55 5249 4905
North & South America Canon U.S.A., Inc.
ITCG METC
65ChallengerRoad,RidgefieldPark,NJ,07660
Tel:+1(800) 423-5367 (Toll Free) Fax:+1(201) 807-3344
ASIA Asia & Hong Kong, S.A.R. Canon Hongkong Company Ltd.
ICP Marketing Div.
19/F, The Metropolis Tower, 10 Metropolis Drive,
Hunghom, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel:+852-3191-2333
89 15
100005 :+86(0)10-8513-9999 :+86(0)10-8513-9915
Korea ( )
607( ,5 )
06173
:(82)2-2191-8500 :(82)2-2191-8576
South & Southeast Asia Canon Singapore Pte. Ltd.
REGICPSales&MarketingDiv.
1 Fusionopolis Place, #15-10, Galaxis,
Singapore 138522
Tel:+65-6799-8888
108-8011 2-16-6
Tel: (03) 3740-3305 Fax: (03) 3740-3307 EUROPE, MIDDLE EAST, AFRICA
Europe/Africa/Middle East Canon Europe Ltd.
Broadcast Products Div.
3TheSquare,StockleyPark,Uxbridge,Middlesex,UB11
1ET UK
Tel:+44(0)20-8588-8140 Fax:+44(0)20-8588-8929 OCEANIA
Oceania Canon Australia Pty. Ltd.
CCI Div.
Building A, The Park Estate, 5 Talavera Road, Macquarie Park
NSW 2113, Australia
Tel:+61(0)2-9805-2000
146-8501 3-30-2
CANON INC. 30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan Subject to change without notice.
100005 89 15
: 2015.
Related manuals for Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual
Manualsnet FAQs
If you want to find out how the BCTV Zoom Lens Canon works, you can view and download the Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual on the Manualsnet website.
Yes, we have the Operation Manual for Canon BCTV Zoom Lens as well as other Canon manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.
The Operation Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Canon BCTV Zoom Lens. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.
The best way to navigate the Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.
This Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.
You can download Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.
To be able to print Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Canon BCTV Zoom Lens Operation Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.